Pioneer AVH P4300DVD Owner's Manual
Owner â s Manual D VD A V RECEIVER A VH-P4300D VD A VH-P3300BT English <QRB3126-A/N>1
Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product. T o ensure proper use, please read through this manual before using this product. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAUTION si n this manual. Please k eep the manual in a safe and acce ssible place for future r efer- ence. Be sure to read this ! DVD video disc r egion numbers 8 ! Handling guidelines 95 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 5 T o ensure safe driving 5 T o avoid battery exhaustion 6 Before you start Information to User 7 For Canadian model 7 The Safety of Y our Ears is in Y our Hands 7 About this unit 7 About this manual 8 Operating environment 8 After-sales ser vice for P ioneer products 8 Visit our website 9 Resetting the microprocessor 9 Demo mode 10 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 10 Use and care of the remote control 10 What âÂÂs what Head unit 11 Remote control 12 Basic operations Basic operations 13 Operating the scroll bar and the scrubber bar 14 Activating the touch panel keys 14 Common operations for menu settings/ lists 15 Adjusting the LCD panel angle 15 Ejecting a disc 15 Ejecting a disc 15 Ejecting an SD 15 Ejecting an SD 16 Setting the clock 16 T uner Introduction of tuner operations 17 Playing moving images Introduction of video playback operations 18 Playing audio Introduction of sound playback operations 21 Using Pandora â Introduction of P andora operations 23 Playing still images Introduction of still image playback operations 25 Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations 26 Bluetooth T elephone Introduction of Bluetooth telephone operations 27 XM/SIRIUS tuner Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner operations 29 HD Radio ä tuner Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner operations 31 Using Bluetooth wireless technology Introduction of Bluetooth telephone operations 32 Bluetooth audio operations 33 <QRB3126-A/N>2 Contents En 2
Detailed instructions Storing and recalling stations 35 Storing the strongest stations 35 T uning in to strong signals 35 T uning in to strong HD Radio signals 35 Using iT unes tagging 36 Switching the media file type 37 Operating the DVD menu 37 Operating this unit âÂÂs iPod function from your iP od 37 Random play (shuffle) 38 Playing all songs in random order (shuffle all) 38 Repeating playback 38 Playing videos from your iP od 38 Browsing for a video/music on the iPod 39 Resume playback (Bookmark) 39 F rame-by-frame playback 39 Slow motion playback 40 Searching for the part you want to play 40 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 40 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 40 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 41 Return to the specified scene 41 Selecting audio output 41 PBC playback 41 Selecting tracks from the track title list 41 Selecting files from the file name list 41 Using advanced sound retriever 42 Changing audiobook speed 42 Displaying lists related to the currently playing song (Link Search) 42 Playing DivX â VOD content 42 Capture an image in JPEG files 43 Changing the wide screen mode 43 Selecting and playing the Quick Mix/station list 44 Storing song information (bookmarks) 44 Switching the XM/SIRIUS channel selection mode 44 Selecting an XM/SIRIUS channel directly 45 Using the MyMix function 45 Using the Game Alert function 47 Displaying the Radio ID 48 Switching the SIRIUS display 48 Using the Instant Replay function 48 Switching the seek mode 49 Switching the reception mode 49 Calling a number in the phone book 49 Selecting a number by alphabet search mode 49 Using the missed, received and dialed call lists 50 Using the missed, received and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adapter 50 Setting automatic answering 50 Adjusting the other party âÂÂs listening volume 51 Switching the ring tone 51 Using the preset dial lists 51 Making a call by entering phone number 51 Setting the private mode 52 P airing from this unit 52 Using a Bluetooth device to pair 52 Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically 53 Switching visible unit 53 Displaying Bluetooth Device address 53 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 54 Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 54 Registering a connected cellular phone 54 V oice recognition 55 <QRB3126-A/N>3 En 3 Contents
Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 55 Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically 55 Displaying Bluetooth Device address 55 Menu operations Introduction of menu operations 56 Audio Adjustments 57 Setting up the DVD player 60 System settings 64 Entertainment settings 69 Customizing menus 70 Other Functions Changing the picture adjustment 71 Setting rear monitor output 71 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 72 Using an AUX source 72 Using an external unit 73 Installation Connecting the units 74 Installation 83 Additional Information T roubleshooting 86 Error messages 88 Understanding auto EQ error messages 92 Understanding messages 92 Indicator list 93 Handling guidelines 95 Compressed audio compatibility (disc, USB, SD) 97 iP od compatibility 98 Sequence of audio files 99 Using the display correctly 99 Copyright and trademark 100 Language code chart for DVD 103 Specifications 104 <QRB3126-A/N>4 Contents En 4
IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWITCH . IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, no viewing of front seat video should ever occur while the vehicle is being driven. ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply, they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. When you attempt to watch a video image while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the front display. T o watch a video image on the front display, park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. <QRB3126-A/N>5 En 5 Section 01 Precautions Precautions
Parking brake interlock Certain functions (Video viewing and certain touch panel keys) offered by this unit could be dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv- ing. T o prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set. If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving, they will be- come disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and (1) apply the parking brake, (2) release the parking brake, and then (3) apply the parking brake again. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake. When using a display connected to V OUT This unit âÂÂs V OUT is for connection of a dis- play to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or Video CD. WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location where the driver can watch a DVD while driving. When using the rear v iew camera With an optional rear view camera, this unit can be used as an aid to keep an eye on trai- lers, or when backing into a tight parking spot. WARNING ! SCREEN IMAGE MA Y APPEAR RE- VERSED. ! USE INPUT ONL Y FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MA Y RESUL T IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur- poses. ! Please note that the edges of the rear view camera images may differ slightly according to whether full screen images are displayed when backing up, and whether the images are used for checking the rear when the vehicle is moving forward. T o avoid battery exhaustion Keep the vehicle engine running when using this unit to avoid draining the battery power . ! When no power is supplied to this unit, such as when the vehicle batter y is being replaced, the microcomputer of this unit re- turns to its initial condition. W e recom- mend that you transcribe the audio adjustment data. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. <QRB3126-A/N>6 En 6 Section 01 Precautions
FCC ID: AJDK028 MODEL NO.: AVH-P3300BT IC: 775E-K028 This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio fre- quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple- ment C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has ver y low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive expo- sure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from per- son âÂÂs body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or op- erated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter . ! A VH-P4300DVD ! This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired oper- ation. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The Safety of Y our Ears is in Y our Hands Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level âÂÂa level that lets the sound come through clearly without annoying blar- ing or distortion and, most importantly , with- out affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing â comfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound, so what sounds âÂÂnormal â can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. EST ABLISH A SAFE LEVEL: ! Set your volume control at a low setting. ! Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , without dis- tortion. ! Once you have established a comfortable sound level, set the dial and leave it there. BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES: ! Do not turn up the volume so high that you can âÂÂt hear what âÂÂs around you. ! Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. ! Do not use headphones while operating a motorized vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo- cated for use in North America. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. <QRB3126-A/N>7 En 7 Section 02 Before you start Before you start
WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords asso- ciated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi- tion 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. CA UTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CA UTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over- heating could result from contact with liquids. ! Keep this manual handy for future reference. ! Always keep the volume low enough to hear outside sounds. ! Avoid exposure to moisture. ! If the battery is disconnected or discharged, any preset memor y will be erased. Important (Serial number) The serial number is located on the bottom of this unit. For your own security and convenience, be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card. DVD video disc region numbers Only DVD video discs with compatible region numbers can be played on this player . Y ou can find the region number of the player on the bottom of this unit and in this manual (refer to Specifications on page 104). About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions to ensure superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit â s potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. Operating environment This unit should be used within the tempera- ture ranges shown below . Operating temperature range: âÂÂ10 ðC to 60 ðC (14 ðF to 140 ðF) EN300328 ETC test temperature: âÂÂ20 ðC and 55 ðC ( âÂÂ4 ðF and 131 ðF) After -sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased this unit for after-sales ser vice (including warranty conditions) or any other informatio n. In case the necessar y infor- mation is not available, please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your unit to the companies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. <QRB3126-A/N>8 En 8 Section 02 Before you start
U.S.A. P ioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P .O . Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SA TISFACTION DEP ARTMENT 300 Allstate P arkway Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Lim- ited Warranty sheet included with this unit. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com in Canada http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca 1 Register your product. W e will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft. 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies. 3 Download owner âÂÂs manuals, order product catalogues, research new products, and much more. 4 Y our feedback is important in our continual ef- fort to design and build the most advanced, consumer-focused product in the industr y . Serial number Resetting the microprocessor By pressing RESET, you can reset the micro - processor to its initial settings without chan- ging the bookmark information. The microprocessor must be reset in the fol- lowing situations: ! Before using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. (AVH-P4300DVD) RESET button (AVH-P3300BT) RESET button Note Switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET in the follow- ing situations: ! After completing connections ! When erasing all stored settings ! When resetting the unit to its initial (factor y) settings <QRB3126-A/N>9 En 9 Section 02 Before you start Before you start
Demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select Off for the source and continues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold MUTE . Press and hold MUTE again to restart. Operating the feature demo while the car en- gine is turned off it may drain the batter y power . Important F ailure to connect the red lead (ACC) of this unit to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations may lead to battery drain. Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po - sitions of the touch panel. Refer to Adjusting the r esponse positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) on page 72. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray on the back of the remote con- trol out and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles aligned properly . ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING ! Keep the batter y out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, consult a doctor immediately . ! Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. CAUTION ! Use one CR2025 (3 V) lithium battery. ! Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! There is a danger of explosion if the batter y is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. ! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ! Do not store the battery with metallic objects. ! If the battery leaks, wipe the remote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, comply with governmental regulations or environmen- tal public institutions â rules that apply in your country/area. ! â P erchlorate Material â special handling may apply . See www .dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. (Applicable to California, U.S.A.) â Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! The remote control may not function properly in direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. <QRB3126-A/N>10 En 10 Section 02 Before you start
Head unit (AVH-P4300DVD) 3 a d (AVH-P3300BT) 2 3 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 9 b 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 a a a a c c c c c d d c c c d 1 Part Part 1 RESET 8 MODE T urning the infor- mation display off. 2 h (eject) 9 MENU Displaying the menu. Returning to the normal display. 3 Disc loading slot a SD memor y card slot Part Part 4 / â ( VOLUME/ VOL ) b USB port When connecting, open the USB con- nector lid. 5 c /d ( TRACK/ SEEK ) c AUX input jack (3.5 mm stereo/ video jack) Use to connect an auxiliar y device. 6 SRC/OFF d Auto EQ micro- phone input jack Use to connect an auto EQ micro- phone. 7 MUTE CAUTION ! (AVH-P3300BT) Use an optional Pioneer USB cable (CD-U50E) to connect the USB audio player/USB mem- ory as any device connected directly to the unit will protrude out from the unit and may be dangerous. ! Do not use unauthorized products. ! When inserting an SD card into the card slot, make sure that the label is facing the left and press the card until it clicks and completely locks into place. ! For details on how to operate a navigation unit from this unit, refer to its operation manual. Note When the navigation unit is connected, press MODE to switch to the navigation display. Press MODE and hold to turn the display off. P ress MODE again to turn the display on. <QRB3126-A/N>11 En 11 Section 03 What â s what What â s what
Remote control 4 5 6 7 e f g k h i l j Part Operation e Thumb pad Click to recall Menu. Use to select a menu on the DVD menu. f RETURN Press to display the PBC (playback con- trol) menu during PBC playback. g f Press to pause or re- sume playback. o Press to return to the previous track (chap- ter). p Press to go to the next track (chapter). g Press to stop play- back. h a /b ( FOLDER/P .CH ) Press to select the next/previous disc/ folder . Press to recall radio station frequenc ies as- signed to preset tun- ing keys. Part Operation i BAND/ESC Press to select the tuner band when tuner is selected as a source. Also used to cancel the control mode of functions. Press to switch be- tween modes when playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD - DA) such as CD - EXTRA and MIXED- MODE CDs. j MENU Press to display the DVD menu during DVD playback . TOP MENU Press to return to the top menu during DVD playback. k AUDIO Press to change the audio language during DVD playback . Press to switch audio output for Video CD/ DivX. SUBTITLE Press to change the subtitle language dur- ing DVD playback. ANGLE Press to change the viewing angle during DVD playback . l REAR SRC Press to cycle through all the available rear sources. Press and hold to turn the rear source off. <QRB3126-A/N>12 En 12 Section 03 What â s what
Basic operation s Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 1 2 Radio Disc iPod SD AUX SD Rear View Rear Front 3 5 4 6 ! T ouch panel keys 1 Displaying the source menu . 2 Wed 28 May 12:45 PM Switching to clock adjust- ment display. Refer to Setting the clock on page 16. 3 Radio Source icon Selecting a favorite sour ce. When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. 4 Rear Front Switching the output source for the rear monitor . Refer to Setting r ear monitor output on page 71. 5 Rear View Switching the rear view image on or off. 6 T urning the unit off . T urning the unit on using the buttons 1 Press SRC/OFF to turn the unit on. T urning the unit off using the buttons 1 Press SRC/OFF and hold un til the unit turns off. Selecting a source using the buttons 1 Press SRC/OFF to cycle through the sources listed below: Selecting a source using the touch panel keys 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. ! XM â XM tuner ! Sirius â SIRIUS tuner ! Radio /HD Radio â Radio/Digital Radio tuner ! AV â AV input ! Disc â Built-in DVD player ! USB/iPod â USB/iPod ! Pandora â Pandora ! SD â SD memor y card ! EXT1 â External unit 1 ! EXT2 â External unit 2 ! AUX â AUX ! TEL/Audio â Bluetooth telephone/audio (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. ! While operating the menu, you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. Adjusting the volume 1 Press / â ( VOLUME/VOL) to adjust the volume . Notes ! In this manual, iP od and iPhone will be re- ferred to as âÂÂiP od âÂÂ. ! The USB/iPod icon will change as follows: â USB is displayed when a USB storage de- vice is connected. â iPod is displayed when an iP od is con- nected. â USB/iPod is displayed when no device is connected. ! When appropriately set up, the image from the rear view camera can be displayed auto- matically . F or details, refer to Setting the rear view camera (back up camera) on page 66. ! An external unit refers to a Pioneer product, such as those which will be available in the fu- ture. Although incompatible as a source, the basic functions of up to two external units can be controlled with this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the external units are automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2. ! If the HD Radio tuner is connected to this unit, tuner source is skipped. <QRB3126-A/N>13 En 13 Section 04 Basic operations Basic operation s
Operating the scroll bar and the scrubber bar Audio Fader/Balance F/R 0 L/R 0 Super Bass On Graphic EQ Auto EQ High Off L/R 0 Sonic Center Control Loudness Subwoofer 1 1 2 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01 01 81 2 01:45 -02:45 01 L R 2 1 Scroll icon Appears when selectable items are hidden. 2 Scrubber bar Appears when the playback point can be spe- cified or set by dragging. Viewing the hidden items 1 T ouch the scroll icon or drag the scrubber bar to view any hidden items. Specifying the playback point 1 Drag the scrubber bar on the screen. (Not available when the scrubber bar is grayed out.) Activating the touch panel keys Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01 01 81 2 01:45 -02:45 01 L R 1 1 1 12 2 2 2 Return 3 1 T ouch panel keys P erform various operations by touching the panel. 2 Open/close keys Control the touch panel key area by touching these keys. 1 T urning the display to simpli- fied display. Returning to the normal dis- play by touching the screen when playing moving images. Returning to the normal dis- play by touching same icon when playing audio. 2 Viewing the hidden touch panel keys. 3 Shorten the touch panel area. <QRB3126-A/N>14 En 14 Section 04 Basic operation s
Common operati ons for menu settings/lists (AVH-P3300BT only) Starting the Bluetooth telephone menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth tel- ephone operations on page 27. Displaying the list menu . Starting the search function. Displaying the menu. Refer to Introduction of menu opera- tions on page 56. Displaying still images as a slide show when listening to another source. Viewing slide shows. Refer to Introduction of still image playback opera tions on page 25. Returning to the previous display. Returning to the previous list/cate- gor y (the folder/categor y one level higher .) ! Press and hold MENU to display Picture Adjustment . Refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 71. Adjusting the LCD panel angle (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. 1 Press h(eject) to display the ejecting menu. 2 Adjust the LCD panel to an easily view- able angle. Laying the panel down. Returning the panel to the upright position. # As the set angle is saved, the LCD panel will automatically be adjusted to the same position the next time the LCD panel is opened. Ejecting a disc (AVH-P4300DVD) 1 Press h(eject) to display the ejecting menu. 2 Eject a disc. Ejecting a disc. Ejecting a disc (AVH-P3300BT) % Press h (eject). Ejecting an SD (AVH-P4300DVD) 1 Press h(eject) to display the ejecting menu. 2 Eject an SD. Ejecting an SD. 3 Press an SD to eject. <QRB3126-A/N>15 En 15 Section 04 Basic operations Basic operation s
Ejecting an SD (AVH-P3300BT) % Press an SD to eject. Setting the clock 1 Switch to Clock Adjustment display . Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Select the item to set. 3 T ouch a or b to set the correct date and time. <QRB3126-A/N>16 En 16 Section 04 Basic operation s
Introduction of tuner operations Wed 28 May 12:45 PM P .ch 2 MHz Band: FM1 Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Local Radio 87.9 87.9 MHz Abcdeabcdeabcde 6 12 3 4 5 ! T ouch panel keys 1 T urning local seek tuning on and off. Refer to T uning in to strong signals on page 35. 2 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 3 Displaying the preset chan - nel list. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. Refer to Storing the strongest stations on page 35. 4 Band: Selecting a band (FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or AM). 5 Recalling radio station fre- quencies assigned to preset tuning keys. 6 TAG Saving song information (tag) from the broadcasti ng station to your iPod . Refer to Using iT unes tagging on page 36. Manual tuning (step by step) using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Seek tuning using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Note Listening AM radio while an iP od is charged from this unit may generate noise. In this case, discon- nect the iPod from this unit. <QRB3126-A/N>17 En 17 Section 05 T uner T uner
Introduction of video playback operations Y ou can view DVD/DVD -R/DVD -RW/CD/CD-R/ CD-RW/USB/SD/iPod . DVD video Return Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01 01 81 2 01:45 -02:45 01 L R Video CD R etu r n iPod video Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01:45 ALL Songs S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab 2067/12345 iPod When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types 01:45 -02:45 ! (AVH-P4300DVD) If an iPod with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit using an interface cable such as the CD-IU200V (sold separately), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od as an iPod source. ! (AVH-P3300BT) If an iPod with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit using an interface cable such as the CD-IU50V (sold separately), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od as an iPod source. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating playback on page 38. 2 During playback, touch the point at which you want to re- sume playback the next time the disc is loaded. Refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 39. 3 Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 43. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Switching betwee n audio languages during playback. Refer to Changing audio lan- guage during playback (Multi- audio) on page 40. 6 Switching betwee n subtitle languages during playback. Refer to Changing the subti- tle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) on page 40. 7 Switching among viewing angles during playback. Refer to Changing the view- ing angle during playback (Multi-angle) on page 41. <QRB3126-A/N>18 En 18 Section 06 Playing moving images
8 Switching the audio out put, when playing video discs re- corded with LPCM audio. Refer to Selecting audio out- put on page 41. Switching betwee n stereo and monaural audio output, when playing Video CD discs. 9 Starting the search function. Refer to Searching for the part you want to play on page 40. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 41. Displaying iPod menus. Refer to Playing videos from your iPod on page 38 and Browsing for a video/music on the iP od on page 39. a P ausing playback. Returning to normal play- back during paused, slow motion, or frame-by-fr ame playback. b Displaying the DVD menu during DVD playback. Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 37. c Returning to the top menu during DVD playback. d Stopping playback . Stopping playback at the point set in Resume play- back. T ouch one more time to stop playback completely when playing DivX. Refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 39. e Displaying arrow keys to op- erate the DVD menu. Refer to Using the arrow k eys on page 37. f Skipping to another title. Selecting a folder during DivX file playback. g Moving ahead one frame at a time during playback. Refer to F rame-by-frame play- back on page 39. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to slow down playback speed. Speeding up the playback speed in four steps during slow motion playback on DVD video/Video CD. h Speeding down the playback speed in four steps , during slow motion playback on Video CD. i Return Returning to the specified scene to which the DVD cur- rently being played has been preprogrammed to return. Refer to Return to the speci- fied scene on page 41. j Playing the video on your iP od in a random order . Refer to Random play (shuf- fle) on page 38. k Switching the Advanced sound retriever function set- ting when playing a video on your iPod . Refer to Using advanced sound re triever on page 42. l Conducting operation from your iPod and listening to it using your car âÂÂs speakers. Refer to Operating this unit âÂÂs iP od function from your iPod on page 37. m Switching betwee n media file types to play on DVD/CD/ USB/SD. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 37. <QRB3126-A/N>19 En 19 Section 06 Playing moving images Playing moving images
Playing back videos 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with the label side up. Playback will automatically start. ! If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu may appear . Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 37 and PBC playback on page 41. ! When the automatic playback function is on, the unit will skip the DVD menu and automatically start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 63. ! While an iPod is connected to this unit, PIONEER, Accessory Attached or (check mark) is dis- played on the iPod . ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. ! Disconnect headphones from the iPod before connecting it to this unit. ! Depending on the iPod model and the amount of data stored in the iPod , it may take some time for playback to begin. ! Use the touch panel keys to select the iPod after connecting it to this unit. ! No Device is displayed when discon necting the iP od. ! If a message is displ ayed after loading a disc con- taining DivX VOD content, touch Play. Refer to Play ing DivX â VOD content on page 42. Ejecting a disc 1 Refer to Eject ing a disc on page 15 or Ejecting an SD on page 15. Selecting a chapter using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). F ast for warding or reversing using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). ! F ast forward/fa st rewind may not always be possi- ble on some discs. In such cases, normal play- back will automatically resu me. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re- corded on CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW . (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. Refer to page 97.) ! Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/- RW) or CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. ! If the bookmark function is on, DVD playback resumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 39. ! Some operations may not be available while watching a DVD due to the programming of the disc. In such cases, the icon appears on the screen. ! T o ensure proper operation, connect the dock connector cable from the iP od directly to this unit. ! While the iPod is connected to this unit, the iP od cannot be turned on or off . However , the iP od can be turned on or off when you select an SD as the source. <QRB3126-A/N>20 En 20 Section 06 Playing moving images
Introduction of sound playback operations Y ou can listen to DVD-R/DVD -RW/CD/CD-R/ CD-RW/USB/SD/iPod sound files. Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 125 01:45 ROM ALL Songs S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab 87 6 1 2 3 4 9 7 5 8 CD Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01:45 ALL Songs S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab 2067/12345 iPod 6h c d e 1 a b 3 4 5 g f i iPod audio Y ou can control an iP od with this unit by using a cable such as the CD-IU50 (sold separately). ! T ouch panel keys 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play- back on page 38. 2 Playing songs in ran dom order . Refer to Random play (shuffle) on page 38. 3 Switching the Advanced sound retriever function setting when playing audio. Refer to Using advanced sound re triever on page 42. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equali- zer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto -equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Displaying a list of track titles/file names to select songs on a CD. Refer to Selecting tracks from the track title list on page 41. Displaying the file name list to select the files. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 41. Displaying iPod menus. Refer to Browsing for a video/music on the iPod on page 39. 6 P ausing and starting playback. 7 Switching the text infor- mation to display on this unit when playing MP3/ WMA/AAC files. 8 Selecting a folder . 9 Switching betwee n media file types on a DVD/CD/USB/SD. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 37. a Playing songs on the iP od in random order . Refer to Random play (shuffle) on page 38. b Changing the speed of audiobook playback on the iPod . Refer to Changing audio - book speed on page 42. <QRB3126-A/N>21 En 21 Section 07 Playing audio Playing audio
c Switching to Link Sear ch mode to play songs re- lated to the currently playing song on the iPod . Refer to Displaying lists related to the currently playing song (Link Search) on page 42. d Playing all songs on the iP od in random order . Refer to Playing all songs in random order (shuffle all) on page 38. e Conducting operation from your iPod and listen- ing to it using your car âÂÂs speakers. Refer to Operating this unit âÂÂs iPod function fr om your iPod on page 37. ! T ext information f Displaying the Songs list on the iPod . Refer to Searching for a video/music by categor y on page 39. g Displaying the Artists list on the iPod . Refer to Searching for a video/music by categor y on page 39. h Displaying the Albums list on the iPod . Refer to Searching for a video/music by categor y on page 39. ! Artwork display i Starting Album Link Search on yo ur iP od when you touch the artwork display. Refer to Displaying lists related to the cur- rently play ing song (Link Search) on page 42. Playing back sound 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with the label side up. Playback will automatically start. ! While an iPod is connected to this unit, PIONEER, Accessory Attached or (check mark) is dis- played on the iPod . ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. ! Disconnect headphones from the iPod before connecting it to this unit. ! Depending on the iPod model and the amount of data stored in the iPod , it may take some time for playback to begin. ! Use the touch panel keys to select the iPod after connecting it to this unit. ! No Device is displayed when discon necting the iP od. Ejecting a disc 1 Refer to Eject ing a disc on page 15 or Ejecting an SD on page 15. Selecting a track using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). F ast for warding or reversing using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Notes ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! T o ensure proper operation, connect the dock connector cable from the iP od directly to this unit. ! While the iPod is connected to this unit, the iP od cannot be turned on or off . However , the iP od can be turned on or off when you select an SD as the source. ! If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. ! T ext information may not be correctly dis- played depending on the recorded environ- ment. ! Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memor y when you are done using it. ! When you select Clock or Speana on Select- ing the background display on page 69, the art- work is not displayed. <QRB3126-A/N>22 En 22 Section 07 Playing audio
Introduction of Pandora operations Y ou can play the P andora by connecting your iP od which was installed the Pandora applica- tion. Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01:45 Pandora S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde 6 12 3 4 7 5 8 Important Requirements to access the P andora music ser- vice using the P ioneer car audio/video products: ! Apple iPhone (first generation), iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS or iPhone 4 with firmware version 3.0 or later . ! Latest version of the P andora application for the iPhone, downloaded to your device. (Search Apple iT unes App Store for â P andora âÂÂ). ! Current P andora account (F ree account and paid accounts available from P andora; create a free account online at http://www .pandora.com/register or through the P andora application for the iPhone). ! iPhone Data Plan. Note: if the Data Plan for your iPhone does not provide for unlimited data usage, addi- tional charges from A T&T may apply for acces- sing the Pandora ser vice via A T&T âÂÂs 3G and/or EDGE networks. ! Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE or WiFi network. ! Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting your iPhone to the P ioneer car audio/video products. Limitations: ! Access to the P andora ser vice will depend on the availability of a cellular and/or WiFi net- work for purposes of allowing your iPhone to connect to the Internet. ! P andora âÂÂs ser vice is currently only available in the U.S. ! Ability of the P ioneer car audio/video products to access the P andora ser vice is subject to change without notice and could be affected by any of the following: compatibility issues with future firmware versions of iPhones; compatibility issues with future firmware ver- sions of the P andora application for the iPhone; changes to the Pandora music ser vice by P andora; discontinuation of the P andora music ser vice by P andora. ! Certain functionality of the P andora service is not available when accessing the ser vice through the Pioneer car audio/video products, including, but not limited to, creating new sta- tions, deleting stations, emailing current sta- tions, buying songs from iT unes, viewing additional text information, logging in to P andora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality . P andora Internet radio is a music service not af- filiated with Pioneer . More information is avail- able at http://www .pandora.com. Y ou can play the P andora by connecting your iP od which was installed the Pandora applica- tion. ! T ouch panel keys <QRB3126-A/N>23 En 23 Section 08 Using Pandora â Using Pandora â
1 Switching the advanced sound retriever function setting while playing P andora. Refer to Using advanced sound re triever on page 42. 2 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equali- zer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto -equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 3 Displaying the QuickMix/ station list to select QuickMix or the desired station. Refer to Selecting and playing the Quick Mix/sta- tion list on page 44. 4 P ausing and starting playback. 5 Storing song information (Bookmark). Refer to Storing song in- formation (bookmarks) on page 44. 6 Giving a âÂÂThumbs Down â for the song curr ently playing and then skip- ping to the next song. 7 Giving a âÂÂThumbs Up â for the song currently play- ing. ! T ext information 8 Playing the station list. Playing songs 1 Open the USB connect or cover . 2 Connect an iPod to the USB cable usi ng an iPod Dock Connector . 3 Start up the Pandora application installed on the iP od. Skipping tracks 1 Press d. <QRB3126-A/N>24 En 24 Section 08 Using Pandora â
Introduction of still image playback operations Y ou can view still images saved in CD -R/CD- RW/USB/SD. CD Capture Photo Wed 28 May 12:45 PM Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Full Off 2 2 5 1 2 34 7 6 8 When playing a disc containing a mixt ure of various media file types 01:45 -02:45 When loading a CD-R/CD -RW/USB/SD con- taining JPEG picture files, this unit starts a sli- deshow from the first folder/picture on the disc/device. The player displays the pictures in each folder on the CD-R/CD -RW in alphabeti- cal order by file name. The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow. ! T ouch panel keys T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating playback on page 38. 2 Playing files in a random order . Refer to Random play (shuf- fle) on page 38. 3 Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 43. 4 Displaying the file name list to select the files. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 41. 5 Starting or pausing the sli- deshow . 6 Rotating the displayed pic- ture 90ð clockwise. 7 Capturing an image in JPEG files. Refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 43. 8 Selecting a folder . 9 Switching betwee n media file types. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 37. Playing still images 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with the label side up. Playback will automatically start. ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. Ejecting a disc. 1 Refer to Eject ing a disc on page 15 or Ejecting an SD on page 15. Selecting a file using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). F ast file searching 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). ! Y ou ca n search 10 JPEG files at a time. Notes ! This unit can play back a JPEG file recorded on CD-R/CD-RW/SD/USB storage device. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. Refer to page 97.) <QRB3126-A/N>25 En 25 Section 09 Playing still images Playing still images
! Files are played back in file number order and folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations Y ou can view still images saved in CD -R/CD- RW/USB/SD as a slideshow when listening to another source. Capture Full Off 8 2 1 6 3 7 45 The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow. ! T ouch panel keys T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating playback on page 38. 2 Playing files in a random order . Refer to Random play (shuf- fle) on page 38. 3 Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 43. 4 Selecting a folder . 5 Selecting a file. 6 Starting or pausing the sli- deshow . 7 Rotating the displayed pic- ture 90ð clockwise 8 Capturing an image in JPEG files. Refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 43. 1 Start slideshow when listening to an- other source. Refer to Common operations for menu set- tings/lists on page 15. Displaying still images as a slide show . 2 Select the device containing the files that you want to display . ! Disc â Built-in DVD player ! USB â USB ! SD â SD memory card # T o cancel searching, touch Cancel. Note When the USB or SD source is selected, this unit cannot view still images on USB/SD as a slideshow . <QRB3126-A/N>26 En 26 Section 09 Playing still images
Introduction of Bluetooth telephone oper ations T elephone standby display Wed 28 May 1 12:45 PM 87.9 MHz P .CH 2 Band: FM1 Radio ABCDEHGHI 012345678901 01 Off On Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde 1 45 7 2 2 16 3 When switching to the entering phone number mode Wed 28 may 1 12:45 PM ABCDEHGHI 012345678901 01 123 456 789 * 0 # C Off 8 b a9 2 Y ou can use Bluetooth telephone (A VH-P3300BT only). Important ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology , using it without the engine run- ning can drain the battery power . ! Advanced operations that require attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , etc., are prohibited while driving. P ark your vehicle in a safe place when using these advanced operations. ! Operations available may be limited depend- ing on the cellular phone connected to this unit. ! Be sure to park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake when per forming this operation. 1 Incoming call notice Indicates that an incoming call has been re- ceived and has not been checked yet. ! Not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. 2 T ouch panel keys 1 Switching the mode to enter the phone number directly . Refer to Making a call by en- tering phone number on page 51. 2 Switching to the call histor y list. Refer to Using the missed, r e- ceived and dialed call lists on page 50. 3 Switching to the phone book mode. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on page 49. Refer to Selecting a number by alphabet search mode on page 49. 4 T urning automa tic answering on or off . Refer to Setting automatic an- swering on page 50. 5 T urning the ring tone for in- coming calls on or off. Refer to Switching the ring tone on page 51. 6 Displaying the preset dial screen. Refer to Using the preset dial lists on page 51. 7 Displaying the Bluetooth connection menu. Refer to the instructions from page 52 to page 54. 8 T urning private mode on or off . Refer to Setting the private mode on page 52. 9 Adjusting the other party âÂÂs listening volume . Refer to Adjusting the other party âÂÂs listening volume on page 51. <QRB3126-A/N>27 En 27 Section 10 Bluetooth T elephone Bluetooth T elephone
a Accepting an incoming call. Making a phone call, when selecting a phone number . Switching betwee n callers on hold. b Ending a call. Rejecting an incoming call. Canceling call waiting. Notes ! P rivate mode can only be operated while you are talking on the phone. ! T o end the call, both you and the other caller must hang up your phones. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection First, you ne ed to connect a Bluetooth telephone to this unit. For detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , see followi ng section. Using a Bluetooth de- vice to pair on page 52 and P airing from this unit on page 52. ! Y ou may also ne ed to enter a PIN code into this unit. If your telephone requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the telephone or in its accompan ying documentation. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wir eless connection on page 54. 2 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume of your cell ular phone to your preference. The unit will record the ad- justed volume level as the default setting. ! The volume of the caller âÂÂs voice and ring tone may var y depending on the type of cellular phone. ! If there is a large volume difference between the ring tone and caller âÂÂs voice , the overall vo- lume level may become unstable. ! Make sure to adjust the volume to a proper level before disconnecting the cellular phone from the unit. If the volume is muted (ze ro level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. <QRB3126-A/N>28 En 28 Section 10 Bluetooth T elephone
Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner operations SIRIUS tuner Wed 28 may 12:45 PM CH183 P .CH 2 Band: SIRIUS Abcdeabcdeabcde SIRIUS CH183 Memo Off Mode All CH T eam Off 6 5 4 12 3 7 Memo Edit T eam Setting Instant Replay Game Info Memo 9 a b c d 8 XM tuner Abcdeabcdeabcde Wed 28 may 12:45 PM CH183 P .ch 2 Band: XM Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde CH183 Mode All CH XM XM 6 5 4 1 Memo Edit Memo 8a b Y ou can use this unit to control an XM satellite digital tuner (GEX-P920XM), which is sold se- parately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on XM operations with this unit which differs from that described in the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manual. Y ou can use this unit to control a SIRIUS Satel- lite Radio tuner , which is sold separately . When the SIRIUS tuner is used together with this unit, some operations differ slightly from those described in the SIRIUS operation man- ual. This manual provides information on these points. For all other information on using the SIRIUS tuner , please refer to the SIR- IUS operation manual. ! With this unit, you can operate one addi- tional function: XM/SIRIUS channel direct selection. Refer to Selecting an XM/SIRIUS channel directly on page 45. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Mode All CH Mode Category Selecting a channel by num- ber or categor y . Refer to Switching the XM/ SIRIUS channel selection mode on page 44. 2 Memo On Memo Off T uning the MyMix funct ion on or off for the SIRI US tuner . Refer to T urning the MyMix function on or off on page 46. 3 Te a m On Te a m Off T urning the Game Ale rt on or off for the SIRIUS tuner . Refer to Switching the Game Alert on or off on page 47. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Displaying the preset chan - nel list. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. Selecting a channel directly. Refer to Selecting an XM/SIR- IUS channel directly on page 45. Selecting a channel from the XM channe l list. Refer to Selecting a channel from the XM channel list dis- play on page 44. <QRB3126-A/N>29 En 29 Section 11 XM/SIRIUS tuner XM/SIRIUS tune r
6 Band: Selecting a band ( XM1 , XM2 or XM3) for XM tuner . Selecting a band ( SIRI US1, SIRIUS2 or SIRIUS3 ) for the SIRIUS tuner . 8 Recalling radio station fre- quencies assigned to preset tuning keys. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. Selecting the channel cate- gor y when selecting Mode Category . Refer to Switching the XM/ SIRIUS channel selection mode on page 44 and Sele ct- ing a SIRIUS channe l from a channel categor y on page 44. 9 Instant Replay Selecting a track, fast for- warding/reversing or paus- ing/playing for the SIRIU S tuner . Refer to Using the Instant Re- play function on page 48. a Memo Storing the song title and ar- tist name. Refer to Making the MyMix playlist on page 45. b Memo Edit Switching to memo edit mode. Refer to Setting up a song alert on page 46. Refer to Deleting a song fro m the MyMix playlist for XM tuner on page 46. Refer to Deleting a song fro m the MyMix playlist for SIRIUS tuner on page 47. c Game Info Displaying information on games for the SIRIUS tuner . Refer to Displaying game in- formation on page 48. d Te a m Setting Selecting teams for game alert on the SIRIU S tuner . Refer to Selecting teams for Game Alert on page 47. ! SIRIUS tuner information 7 Switching the SIRIUS information. Refer to Switching the SIRIUS displ ay on page 48. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to scroll the text. Manual tuning (step by step) using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Seek tuning using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Note Y ou can also perform tuning from a desired chan- nel categor y . (Refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel from a channel categor y on page 44.) <QRB3126-A/N>30 En 30 Section 11 XM/SIRIUS tune r
Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner operations Abcdeabcdeabcde Wed 28 may 12:45 PM 87.9 MHz P .CH 2 Band: FM1 TA G Digital Radio Local 87.9 MHz Seek All Blending D/A Auto 67 8 9 1 4 2 35 This HD Radio Ready receiver is ready to re- ceive HD Radio broadcasts when connected to the HD Radio tuner (e.g. GEX-P20HD), sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the HD Radio tuner âÂÂs operation manual. ! T ouch panel keys 1 T urning local seek tuning on or off. Refer to T uning in to strong HD Radio signals on page 35. 2 Seek All Seek HD Switching betwee n Digital broadcasting sta tion seek and normal seek. Refer to Switching the seek mode on page 49. 3 Blending D/A Auto Blending Analog Switching to the analog broadcast of the same fre- quency . Refer to Switching the recep- tion mode on page 49. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Displaying the preset chan - nel list. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. 6 Band: Selecting a band (FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or AM). 8 Recalling radio station fre- quencies assigned to preset tuning keys. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. 9 TAG Saving song information (tag) from the broadcasti ng station to your iPod . ! Digital Radio tuner information 7 Switching the digital radio tuner informa- tion. Manual tuning (step by step) using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Seek tuning using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). <QRB3126-A/N>31 En 31 Section 12 HD Radio ä tuner HD Radio ä tuner
Introduction of Bluetooth telephone oper ations During a call Abcdeabc Wed 28 May 12:45 PM REG T ext Scroll TEL 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 Except during a call REG T ext Scroll a When you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200 )(sold separately) to AVH- P4300DVD, you can control Bluetooth tele- phone. But the available features are limited. Important ! In some countries, CD- BTB200 is not sold on the market. ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology , using it without the engine run- ning can drain the battery power . ! Advanced operations that require attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , etc., are prohibited while driving. P ark your vehicle in a safe place when using these advanced operations. ! Operations available may be limited depend- ing on the cellular phone connected to this unit. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 2 Accepting an incoming call. Making a phone call, when selecting a phone number from the dialed and received call histor y . 3 Ending a call. Rejecting an incoming call. Canceling call waiting. 4 Displaying the received/ missed call histor y . Selecting a phone number from the call histor y. Refer to Using the missed, r e- ceived and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adap- ter on page 50. 5 Displaying the dialed call his- tory. Selecting a phone number from the call histor y. Refer to Using the missed, r e- ceived and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adap- ter on page 50. 6 Text Scroll Scrolling the phone number . T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to activate connection mode on this unit and establish a Blue- tooth wireless connection from your phone. Refer to Using a cellu lar phone to initiate a connection on page 54. <QRB3126-A/N>32 En 32 Section 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology
7 Registering connected cellu- lar phone to take full ad van- tage of the features available with Bluetooth wireless tech- nology. Refer to Registering a con- nected cellular phone on page 54. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to termi- nate the Bluetooth wireless connection. 8 T urning automa tic answering on or off . Refer to Setting automatic an- swering on page 50. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to connect to a Bluetooth telephone automatically. Refer to Connecting to a Blue- tooth device automatically on page 55. 9 T urning the ring tone for in- coming calls on or off. Refer to Switching the ring tone on page 51. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to display the Bluetooth device address of your cellular phone and the Bluetooth adapter . Refer to Displaying Bluetoo th Device addr ess on page 55. a Switching between Bluetooth telephone and Bluetooth audio. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to start voice recognition. Refer to V oice recogni tion on page 55. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection First, you ne ed to connect a Bluetooth telephone to this unit. For detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , see followi ng section. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connect ion on page 54 and Registering a connected cellular phone on page 54. 2 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume of your cell ular phone to your preference. The unit will record the ad- justed volume level as the default setting. ! The volume of the caller âÂÂs voice and ring tone may var y depending on the type of cellular phone. ! If there is a large volume difference between the ring tone and caller âÂÂs voice , the overall vo- lume level may become unstable. ! Make sure to adjust the volume to a proper level before disconnecting the cellular phone from the unit. If the volume is muted (ze ro level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. Bluetooth au dio operations When you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200)(sold separately) to A VH- P4300DVD, you can control Bluetooth audio. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the available operations will be limited to the following two levels: â A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution P rofile): Y ou can only playback songs on your audio player . â AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Con- trol Profile): Y ou can per form playback, pause playback, select songs, etc. ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, available op- erations will var y extensively . When operating your player with this unit, refer to the instruc- tion manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual. <QRB3126-A/N>33 En 33 Section 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology Using Bluetooth wireless technology
! Information related to a song (such as the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) cannot be displayed on this unit. ! As the signal from your cellular phone may cause noise, avoid using it when you are lis- tening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player . ! When a call is in progress on the cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , the sound of the Blue- tooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! When the Bluetooth audio player is in use, you cannot connect to a Bluetooth telephone automatically . ! Playback continues even if you switch from your Bluetooth audio player to another source while listening to a song. ! T ouch panel keys Switching betwee n Bluetooth tele- phone and Bluetooth audio. Skipping back or for ward to an- other track when Auto is set for the auto/manual setting. Performing fast for ward or rewind when Manual is set for the auto/ manual setting. F1 P ausing a song. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to activate connection mode on this unit and establish a Bluetooth wirele ss connection from your player . Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on page 55. F2 Playback starts. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to terminate the Blue- tooth wireless connection. Auto Setting the action for c and d icons. Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto-equalizer on page 58. Setting up for Bluetooth audio Before you can use the Bluetooth audio func- tion you must set up the unit for use with your Bluetooth audio player . This entails establish- ing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your Bluetooth audio player , and pairing your Bluetooth audio player with this unit. 1 Connection First, you ne ed to connect a Bluetooth audio to this unit. For detailed instructions on connecting your Bluetooth audio to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology, see Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on page 55. <QRB3126-A/N>34 En 34 Section 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology
Storing and recalling stations Y ou can easily store up to six stations for each band as presets. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memor y . ! Channels are stored and recalled on a broadcast station basis. This means that if the broadcast station you stored has been assigned to a different channel by SIRIUS, you can still recall the same broadcast sta- tion (though a different channel number may appear in the display). 1 Display the preset screen. Refer to Introduction of tuner operations on page 17. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. The preset screen appears in the display. 2 T ouch and hold one of the preset tun- ing keys to store the selected frequency in the memory . The selected radio station frequency has been stored in the memor y . 3 T ouch one of the preset tuning keys to select the desired station. # Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys Preset1 to Preset6 when the Mode All CH mode is se- lected. (F unction of SIRIUS tuner) Storing the strongest stations BSM (best stations memor y) automatically stores the six strongest stations in the order of their signal strength. Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using the preset tuning keys. 1 Display the preset screen. Refer to Introduction of tuner operations on page 17. Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. The preset screen appears in the display. 2 T ouch BSM to turn BSM on. The six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys in order of their signal strength. # T o cancel the storage process, touch Cancel . T uning in to strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in to only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. FM: off â â â â AM: off â â The highest level setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower levels allow the reception of weaker stations. T uning in to strong HD Radio signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in to only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Start local seek tuning Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. 2 T ouch On on Local to turn on. # T o turn off , touch Off . 3 T ouch c or d on Level to select the de- sired level. # Level1 âÂÂLevel2 âÂÂLevel3 â Level4 <QRB3126-A/N>35 En 35 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
# The larger the setting number , the higher the signal level. The highest level setting allows re- ception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Using iT unes tagging This function can be operated with the following iP od models. â iPhone 4 â iPhone 3GS â iPhone 3G â iPhone â iP od nano 5th generation â iP od 5th generation â iP od nano 4th generation â iP od nano 3rd generation â iP od touch 2nd generation â iP od touch 1st generation â iP od classic 2nd generation â iP od classic However , tag information can be stored in this unit even while other iP od models are used. When you want to use this function in the HD Radio tuner sour ce, use an HD Radio tuner (GEX-P20HD). The song informatio n (tag) can be saved from the broadcasting station to your iP od . The songs will show up in a playlist called âÂÂT agged playlist â in iT unes the next time you sync your iP od. Then you can directly buy the songs you want from the iT unes Store. The tagged songs and the song that you can buy from the iT unes Store may be different. Make sure to confirm the song before you make the purchase. If you cannot use this function normally , up- date your iPod firmware. Storing the tag information to this unit 1 T une in to the broadcast station. 2 Store the tag information to this unit. Refer to Introduction of tuner operations on page 17. Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. Y ou can store the information if the TA G indi- cator is displayed while the desired song is being broadcast. # While storing the tag data on this unit, TA G flashes. # The tag information for up to 50 songs can be stored on this unit. Depending on the timing of when the tag infor- mation is stored, the tag information for the song played before or aft er the currently playing song may also be stored. # If an SD is selected as the source while tag in- formation is being stored to this unit, the tag in- formation will not be transferred to the iPod . 3 When completed, indicator turns off and indicator is displayed. Storing the tagged information to your iPod 1 Connect your iPod if it's not connected to this unit. When your iPod is connected to this unit, your iP od starts storing the tagged information automatically . # While transferring the tag, you cannot select the SD source. 2 When completed, indicator on page 93 tur ns off and the tagged information is stored on your iPod. # T ag information cannot be transferred to the iP od when a file on an SD device is being viewed as a slideshow . <QRB3126-A/N>36 En 36 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types, such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Audio data (CD -DA) and JPEG picture files on DVD-R/RW/ROM cannot be played back on this unit. CD (audio data (CD-DA)) âÂÂMusic/ROM (com- pressed audio) â Video (DivX video files) â Photo (JPEG picture files) Operating the DVD menu (F unction for DVD video) Some DVDs allow you to make a selection from the disc contents using a menu. Using the arrow keys 1 Display arrow keys to operate the DVD menu. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 Select the desired menu item. Selecting the desired menu item. Starting playback from the se- lected menu item. Operating the DVD menu by di- rectly touching the menu item. # When operating the DVD menu by directly touching the menu item, touch the icon to oper- ate. Returning to the normal DVD video display . Displaying arrow keys. # W ays to display the menu will differ depend- ing on the disc. # Depending on the contents of the DVD disc, this function may not work properly . In such cases, use the touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. Operating this unit â s iPod function from your iPod Y ou can listen to the sound from your iPod ap- plications using your car âÂÂs speakers, when App Mode is selected with following iPod models. ! iP od nano 1st generation ! iP od 5th generation APP mode is compatible with the following iP od models. ! iPhone 4 (sof tware version 4.1 or later) ! iPhone 3GS (sof tware version 4.1 or later) ! iPhone 3G (sof tware version 4.1 or later) ! iPhone (sof tware version 3.1.3 or later) ! iP od touch 3rd generation (software version 4.0 or later) ! iP od touch 2nd generation (software ver- sion 4.0 or later) ! iP od touch 1st generation (software version 3.1.3 or later) ! While this function is in use, the iPod will not turn off even if the ignition key is turned off . Operate the iPod to turn off the power . 1 Switch the control mode to App Mode. Refer to Introduction of video playback opera- tions on page 18. Refer to Introduction of sound playback opera- tions on page 21. 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a video/song and play . <QRB3126-A/N>37 En 37 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Note The following functions are still accessible from the unit even if the control mode is set to App Mode . However , the operation will depend on your appli- cations. ! P ausing ! F ast for warding/reversing ! T racking up/down ! Moving to a chapter up/down Random play (shuffle) iP od-videos/so ngs can be played back in ran- dom order . ! Songs â Play back videos/songs in the se- lected list in random order . ! Albums â Play back videos/songs from a randomly selected album in order . ! Folder â Play back songs/tracks in the se- lected folder in random order . ! Disc â Play back songs/tracks in the se- lected disc in random order . ! On â Play back files in random order within the repeat range, Folder and Disc . ! Off â Cancel random play . Playing all songs in rand om order (shuffle all) (F unction for iPod) This method plays all songs on the iPod randomly . Repeating playba ck ! Disc â Play through the current disc ! Chapter â Repeat the current chapter ! Title â Repeat the current title ! T rack â Repeat the current track ! File â Repeat the current file ! Folder â Repeat the current folder ! One â Repeat just the current video/song/ track ! All â Repeat all videos/songs in the se- lected list on the iP od Repeat all files ! This function cannot be operated during Video CD playback featuring PBC (playback control). ! If you per form chapter search, fast for ward/ reverse, frame-by-frame playback or slow motion playback, the repeat play will stop. ! When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA), playback is re- peated within the type of data currently playing even if Disc is selected. ! If you selec t another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to Disc. If you selec t USB or SD source, the repeat play range changes to All. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/ reverse during File, the repeat play range changes to Folder. ! If you per form title/chapter search or fast forward/reverse during Chapter, the repeat play range changes to OFF. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/ reverse during T rack , the repeat play range changes to Disc. ! When Folder is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing videos from your iPod (F unction for iPod) Videos can be played on this unit if an iPod with video capabilities is connected. ! This unit can play back âÂÂMovies âÂÂ, âÂÂMusic vi- deos âÂÂ, âÂÂVideo Podcast â and âÂÂTV show â which are downloaded from the iT unes store. ! Before you display the video screen, be sure to change the video setting on the iP od so that the iPod can output the video to an external device. 1 Display the iPod menus. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 Switch to iPod video mode. Video Switching to iPod video mode. <QRB3126-A/N>38 En 38 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
3 Play the video from the iPod. # If you want to switch to iP od music mode, touch the icon. Music Switching to iPod music mode. Browsing for a video/mu sic on the iPod (F unction for iPod) T o make operating and searching easy, opera- tions to control an iP od with this unit are de- signed to be as similar to the iPod as possible. Searching for a video/music by category 1 Display the iPod menus. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. Refer to Playing audio on page 21. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a video/music. ! Video Playlists (video playlists) ! Movies (movies) ! Music Videos (music videos) ! Video Podcasts (video podcasts) ! TV Shows (TV shows) ! Playlists (playlists) ! Artists (artists) ! Albums (albums) ! Songs (songs) ! Podcasts (podcasts) ! Genres (genres) ! Composers (composers) ! Audiobooks (audiobooks) 3 T ouch the title of the list that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired video/music. 4 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Searching the list by alphabet (F unction for iPod) 1 Select a category . Refer to Searching for a video/music by cate- gor y on this page. 2 Switch to alphabet search mode. Switching to alphabet search mode. Alphabet search mode is displayed. 3 T ouch the first letter of the title of the video/song you are looking for . While searching, touch panel key operation is not available. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch Cancel. 4 T ouch the title of the list that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song/video. 5 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Resume playback (Bookmark) (F unction for DVD video) By using the Bookmark function, you can re- sume playback from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. ! T o clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and hold the button during playback. ! The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. Frame-by-frame playback (F unction for DVD video/video CD/DivX file) <QRB3126-A/N>39 En 39 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Note Images during frame-by-frame playback may be unclear for some discs. Slow motion playback Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Images during slow motion playback may be unclear for some discs. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not available. Searching for the part you want to play Y ou can use the search function to find the part you want to play . F or DVD videos, you can select Title (title), Chapter (chapter) or 10key (numeric keypad). F or video CDs, you can select T rack (track) or 10key (numeric keypad). ! Chapter search is not available when disc playback is stopped. ! This function cannot be operated during some DVD videos or Video CD playback featuring PBC (playback control). 1 Start the search function. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 T ouch the desired search option (e.g., Chapter). 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the entered numbers, touch C . 4 Start playback from the selected part. Registering the numbers and start- ing playback. Note With discs featuring a menu, you can also use the DVD menu to make your selection. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) With DVDs/DivX files that provides audio play- back in different languages and different audio systems (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.), you can switch between languages/audio systems during playback. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display. ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using Video Setup menu. F or details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 60. ! Depending on the setting, the video may not be played back with the audio system used to record the DVD. ! Y ou will return to normal playback if you change the Audio during fast forward/fast re- wind, pause or slow motion playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs/DivX files featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using Video Setup menu. F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 60. ! Y ou will return to normal playback if you change the Subtitle during fast forward/fast rewind, pause or slow motion playback. <QRB3126-A/N>40 En 40 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is displayed. Use the Video Setup menu to turn the angle icon display on or off . For details, refer to Setting the multi-angle DVD display on page 60. Note Y ou will return to normal playback if you change the viewing angle during fast forward/fast rewind, pause or slow motion playback. Return to the specified scene (F unction for DVD video) This function cannot be used if a specified scene has not been preprogrammed on the DVD disc. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. When playing video CDs, you can switch be- tween stereo and monaural audio output. ! This function is not available when disc playback is stopped. ! L R â left and right ! Left â lef t ! Right â right ! Mix â mixing left and right Y ou may not be able to select or use this func- tion depending on the disc and the playback location. PBC playback (F unction for Video CDs) During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. 1 Start the search function. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 T ouch 10key to display the numeric keypad. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu number . 4 Start playback from the selected part. Registering the numbers and start- ing playback. Notes ! Y ou can display the menu by touching Return during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of a Video CD cannot be can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), you cannot select the re- peat play range or use the search function. Selecting tracks from the track title list Y ou can select tracks to playback using the track title list which is a list of the tracks re- corded on a disc. 1 Display the track title list. Refer to Playing audio on page 21. 2 T ouch your favorite track title. Playback begins. Selecting files from the file name list (F unction for compressed audio/DivX/JPEG) File name list is a list of file names (or folder names) from which you can select a file (or folder) to play back. 1 Display the file (or folder) name list. Refer to Playing audio on page 21. <QRB3126-A/N>41 En 41 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. 2 T ouch your favorite file (or folder) name. # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat this operation to select the de- sired file name. # If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 3 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Using advanced sound retriever Automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. Off â â ! is more effective than . Changing audiobook spee d (F unction for iPod) ! â Playback at a speed faster than normal ! â Playback at normal speed ! â Playback at a speed slower than nor- mal Displaying lists related to the currently playing song (Link Search) (F unction for iPod) 1 Start Link Search. Refer to Introduction of sound playback opera- tions on page 21. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to play . ! Artist â Displays an album list of the artist currently being played. ! Album â Displays a song list from the album currently being played. ! Genre â Displays an album list from the genre currently being played. # T o cancel searching, touch Cancel. 3 T ouch the title of the list that you want to play . 4 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Playing DivX â VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of content, the remaining number of times it can be played is shown on-screen. Y ou can then decide whether or not to play the disc. ! If there is no limit to the number of times the DivX VOD content can be viewed, then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. ! Y ou can confirm the number of times that the content can be played by checking the number displayed af ter Remaining Views:. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD contents on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD contents provider . For details on your registration code, refer to Displaying the DivX â VOD registration code on page 63. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. <QRB3126-A/N>42 En 42 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
% If a message is displayed after loading a disc containing DivX VOD content, touch Play. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, touch Next Play. # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, touch Stop. Capture an image in JPEG files Y ou can capture image data and use it as wall- paper . Images can be stored and recalled ea- sily in this unit. ! Only one image can be stored on this unit. Old image is over written with the new one. 1 Pause the slideshow when the desired image is displayed. Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. Refer to Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations on page 26. 2 Capture the image. Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. Refer to Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations on page 26. 3 When Do you save this image? is dis- played, touch Y es. While storing the image to this unit, Saving the image Don âÂÂt switch off the battery . is displayed. When the process is finished, Image saved is displayed. # T o cancel the storage process, touch No . Changing the wide screen mode Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 picture. 1 Display the screen mode. Refer to Introduction of video playback opera- tions on page 18. Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. Refer to Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations on page 26. 2 T ouch the desired wide mode setting. Full (full screen) The 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. Just (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally toward the edges of the screen, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even when viewing on a wide screen. Cinema (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal for a cinema- sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside the picture. Zoom (zoom) The 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a cinema sized picture (wide screen picture). Normal (normal) The 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Y ou cannot operate this function while driving. ! Different settings can be stored for each video source. ! When a video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! The video image will appear coarser when viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode. <QRB3126-A/N>43 En 43 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Selecting and playing the Quick Mix/sta tion list T ouch the list for your P andora stations to se- lect one of them to play . 1 Display the Quick Mix/station list. Refer to Introduction of P andora operations on page 23. 2 Change the sort order . Y ou can sort the items in the list al- phabetically. Y ou can sort the items in the list in order of the da tes on which the items were created. 3 Select QuickMix or the desired station. Y ou can play only one song at a time from a shuffled mix of several sta- tions. Storing song information (bookmarks) With the Bookmark function, you can select an artist or a song to add to Bookmarks. 1 Switch to song information (bookmark) storing mode. Refer to Introduction of P andora operations on page 23. The song informatio n (bookmark) storing mode is displayed. 2 Storing or canceling a bookmark. Adding informatio n for the song cur- rently playing to Boo kmarks. Adding artist information for the song currently playing to Book- marks. Canceling a bookmark. Switching the XM/SIRIUS channel selec tion mode Y ou have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by categor y . When selecting by number , channels in any categor y can be selected. Select by categor y to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular categor y . Mode All CH (channel number select setting) â Mode Category (channel categor y select setting) Selecting a SIRIUS channel from a channel category Channels are organized into various program categories, e.g. Rock, Classic, Jazz while lis- tening to a SIRIUS station. Y ou can specify channels by selecting the desired categor y . 1 Select channel category selection mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Mode All CH (channel number select setting) â Mode Category (channel categor y select setting) 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired chan- nel category . 3 T ouch c or d on the buttons to select the desired channel in the selected channel category . Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! The channel list shows all the channels during Mode All CH mode, and the chan- nels included in the selected categor y dur- ing Mode Category mode. <QRB3126-A/N>44 En 44 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
1 Display the preset channel list. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 Switch the channel list mode. Switching the channel list mode to the channel name or the artist name/song title. 3 T ouch the desired channel that you want to listen to. Selecting an XM/SIRIUS channel directly Y ou can select an XM/SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number . 1 Display the preset channel list. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 Switch to direct input display . Switching to direct input display. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan- nel number . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . 4 Select the XM/SIRIUS channel of the en- tered number . The XM/SIRIUS channel of the entered num- ber is selected. Selecting the XM/SIRIUS chan nel of the entered number . Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make a MyMix song playlist. When a song in the MyMix playlist is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune in to the other station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM/ SIRIUS tuner . ! The track itself is NOT downloaded. Only the song title and artist name are stored. Making the MyMix playlist Y ou can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name are stored to this unit. The MyMix function will start when you listen to a song that matches a song title and its ar- tist name in the MyMix playlist. % Store the song title and artist name. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are stored, and a confirmation message appears. # T o delete a song from the MyMix playlist, refer to Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for XM tuner on the next page and Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for SIRIUS tuner on page 47. # (XM tuner) The song title and artist name of up to 12 tracks can be stored. Old tracks will be overwritten when saving more than 12 tracks. # (SIRIUS tuner) The song title and artist name of up to 10 tracks can be stored. # Y ou cannot store the song title or the artist name when â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ â is displayed for the title information. # Y ou cannot store song titles or artist names from channel 000. # Stored titles may not be displayed correctly . When a song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast (XM tuner) As soon as a song in the MyMix playlist starts being broadcast on a different station, a mes- sage is displayed. T ouch Ye s to switch to that station, and you can listen to that song. (SIRIUS tuner) As soon as a stored song starts being broad- cast on a different station, a song alert is dis- played. <QRB3126-A/N>45 En 45 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Switching to the other station to lis- ten to that track. Not tuning in to the oth er station. ! (XM tuner) If you would rather not to tune in to the other station, touch No. ! If an alert for a song in the MyMix playlist is set to off, no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Set- ting up a song alert on this page. ! If the stored title and the title of the song being broadcast differ , no alert will be pro - vided even if they are the same song. T ur ning the MyMix function on or off Y ou can turn the MyMix function off and stop the alerts for all the songs in the MyMix play- list. T o restart, turn this function on. The MyMix function is on as the default set- ting. % T urn the MyMix function on or off. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Setting up a song alert Y ou can set up an alert (on or off) for each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert set- ting. Set the alert to on to receive an alert when the song is broadcast, or set it to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 Switch to memo edit mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 Select the song title for which you want to tur n the alert on or off. (XM tuner) The check mark is removed, and the alert for that song is off . (SIRIUS tuner) Selecting the song title for which you want to turn the alert off. 3 T ur n the alert on or off. (SIRIUS tuner) T urning the alert on or off . Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for XM tuner Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix play- list. 1 Switch to memo edit mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 Delete the song title. Deleting the song title. Deleting all the songs in the MyMix playlist. That song will be deleted from the MyMix play- list. A message to confirm deletion will appear . 3 T ouch Y es. # T o cancel deletion, touch No . Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for SIRIUS tuner Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix play- list. 1 Switch to memo edit mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. <QRB3126-A/N>46 En 46 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
2 Select the song title that you want to delete. Selecting the song title that you want to delete. 3 Delete the song title. Deleting the song title. A message to confirm deletion will appear . 4 T ouch Y es. That song will be deleted from the MyMix play- list. # T o cancel deletion, touch No . Using the Game Alert function This system can alert you when games invol- ving your favorite teams are about to start. T o use this function you need to set up a game alert for the teams in advance. ! This function is available for SIR-PNR2/SIR - PNR2C. Selecting teams for Game Alert 1 Start Game Alert setup. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 Select a desired league in League Switching the league name. 3 Select a desired team in T eam. Switching the team nam e. 4 T ur n the alert on or off. T urning the alert on or off . The game alert function is activated for that team. # When you have already selected 12 teams, FULL is displayed and additional teams cannot be selected. In this case, first delete a selected team and then try again. 5 Repeat these steps to select other teams. Up to 12 teams can be selected. Switching the Game Alert on or off Once you select the teams, you need to turn the Game Alert function on. The Game Alert function is on at the default setting. When a game of a selected team starts When a game of the selected team is about to start (or is currently playing) on a different sta- tion, a game alert is displayed. Switching to the other station to lis- ten to the game. Not tuning in to the oth er station. <QRB3126-A/N>47 En 47 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Displaying game information If any games of the selected teams are cur- rently playing, you can display information on the games and tune in to the broadcast chan- nel. 1 Display the game information for the selected team. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 T ouch c or d to select a game. The game is displayed, followed by more de- tailed game information. ! The game score will be updated automati- cally . 3 Switch to the other station to listen to the game. Switching to the other station to lis- ten to the game. # If you have not selected any teams, NOT SET is displayed. # When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing, NO GAME is displayed. Displaying the Radio ID Channel number selection setting If you selec t CH000, the ID code is displayed. % Select CH000. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Switching the SIRIUS display ! Actions will differ depending on the con- nected SIRIUS tuner . % T ouch SIRIUS information to switch the SIRIUS display . Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Channel number âÂÂChannel name âÂÂCategor y name âÂÂArtist name âÂÂSong title/Title name â Composer name âÂÂPlay time Note Play time is displayed during the Instant Replay mode. Using the Instant Replay function The following functions can be operated in In- stant Replay mode. ! T o use this function, a P ioneer SIRIUS bus inter face (e.g. CD-SB10) is required. ! T o use this function, a SIRIUS plug-and- play unit with an Instant Replay Function is required. ! F or details, refer to the SIRIUS plug-and- play unit âÂÂs manuals. % T o exit from Instant Replay mode, se- lect another source or touch the following icon. Exiting from Instant Replay mode. % Select a track Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). % Fast forward or reverse Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). % Pause and play Playing and pausing. Switching the seek mode There are two seek tuning settings, one is Seek HD (Digital broadcasting stations seek) and the other is Seek All (normal seek). Seek All âÂÂSeek HD <QRB3126-A/N>48 En 48 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Switching the reception mode If the reception for a digital broadcast be- comes poor , this unit automatically switches to the analog broadcast of the same fre- quency . If this function is set to D/A Auto, the tuner switches between digital broadcast and analog broadcast automatically. If this func- tion is set to Analog, the tuner will only re- ceive analog broadcasts. D/A Auto âÂÂAnalog Note If SEEK MODE is set to Seek HD and BLENDING is set to Analog , the tuner cannot receive broad- casts. In this case, the seek mode or reception mode is changed automatically as follows: ! When SEEK MODE is set to Seek HD, if you switch BLENDING from D/A Auto to Analog, SEEK MODE is changed to Seek All . ! When BLENDING is set to Analog, if you switch SEEK MODE from Seek All to Seek HD , BLENDING is changed to D/A Auto . Calling a number in the phone book (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) The phone book in your cellular phone will be transferred automatically when the phone is connected to this unit. After finding the number you want to call in the phone book, you can select the entr y and make the call. 1 Switch to phone book mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. The phone book display appears. 2 Select the phone number list. The detailed phone number list of the selected entr y is displayed. 3 Select the phone number . # If you want to store the phone number , touch and hold the list. 4 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 5 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Note Depending on the cellular phone, the phone book may not be transferred automatically . In this case, operate your cellular phone to transfer the phone book. The visibility of this unit should be on. Refer to Switching visible unit on page 53. Selecting a number by alphabet search mode (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) If a lot of numbers are registered in the phone book, you can search for the phone number by alphabet search mode. 1 Switch to phone book mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. The phone book display appears. 2 T ouch ABC to switch to alphabet search mode. 3 T ouch the first letter of the entry you are looking for . The Phone Book entries starting with that let- ter (e.g. âÂÂBen âÂÂ, âÂÂBrian â and âÂÂBurt â when âÂÂB â is selected) will be displayed. # If you want to change the character to Rus- sian, touch the icon. T o return to English, touch the icon again. Changing the character to Russian. # The order of the first name and last name may be different from that of the cellular phone. 4 T ouch the list to display the phone number list of the selected entry . # If several phone numbers are included in an entry, select one by touching the list. <QRB3126-A/N>49 En 49 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
# If you want to switch to the call histor y list, touch the icon. Switching to the call histor y list. 5 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 6 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Using the missed, received and dialed call lists (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) The 80 most recent calls dialed, rece ived, and missed are stored in the memory. Y ou can browse them and call numbers from these lists. 1 Switch to the call history list. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 Select Missed Calls, Dialled Calls or Received Calls. Displaying the received call list. Displaying the dialed call list. Displaying the missed call list. 3 T ouch the list number to select a phone number . Name and phone number are displayed in the detailed list. # If you want to store the phone number , touch and hold the list. 4 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 5 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Using the missed, received and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adap ter (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) The 80 most recent calls dialed, rece ived, and missed are stored in the memory. Y ou can browse them and call numbers from these lists. 1 Switch to the call history list. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. 3 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 4 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. Setting automatic answering If this function is on, this unit automatically answers all incoming calls. % T urn automatic answering on or off. (AVH-P4300DVD) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. (AVH-P3300BT) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. <QRB3126-A/N>50 En 50 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Adjusting the other party â s listening volume (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) T o maintain the good sound quality, this unit can adjust the other party âÂÂs listening volume. If the volume is not loud enough for the other party , use this function. % Select Far -End VOL. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 1 âÂÂ2 âÂÂ3 # This function can be performed even while talking on the phone. # Settings can be stored for each device. Switching the ring tone Y ou can select whether or not to use this unit âÂÂs ring tone. If this function is set to on, the ring tone for this unit will sound. 1 Connect your cellular phone to this unit. 2 T ur n ring tone on or off. (AVH-P4300DVD) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. (AVH-P3300BT) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Using the preset dial lists (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) Y ou can easily store up to six phone numbers as presets. 1 Display the preset screen. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch one of preset dial keys to select the desired phone number . # If you want to delete a preset phone number , touch and hold the preset dial key. 3 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 4 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Making a call by entering phone number (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) Wed 28 may 1 12:45 PM ABCDEHGHI 012345678901 01 123 456 789 * 0 # C Off Important Be sure to park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake when per forming this op- eration. 1 Switch to the entering phone number mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch the number icons to input the numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. 3 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 4 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. <QRB3126-A/N>51 En 51 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Note Entering phone number mode cannot be oper- ated unless a Bluetooth telephone is connected to this unit. Setting the private mode (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) During a conversation, you can switch to pri- vate mode (talk directly on your cellular phone). Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Pairing from this unit (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) Connection 01: Phone1 02: Phone2 03: Phone3 04: Phone4 05: Phone5 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Connection to select a device. 3 Start to search. Starting to search. While searching, is displayed and when available devices are found, the device names or Bluetooth device addresses (if names can- not be obtained) are displayed. # If you want to switch between the device names and Bluetooth device addresses, touch the icon. Switching betwee n the device names and Bluetooth device ad- dresses. # T o cancel searching, touch Stop. # If five devices are already paired, Memory Full is displayed and pairing cannot be performed. In such cases, delete a paired device first. Refer to this page. # If no device can be found, Not Found is dis- played. In such cases, check the status of the Bluetooth device and search again. 4 T ouch a device name to select the de- vice you want to connect to. While connecting, Pairing is displayed. If the connection is established, Paired is displayed. # If the connection fails, Error is displayed. In such cases, tr y again from the beginning. # The PIN code is set to 0000 as the default, but can be changed. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 54. # When establishing connection, the icon is dis- played. T ouch the icon to disconnect the device. Disconnecting a Bluetooth device. # If you want to delete a paired Bluetooth tele- phone, display Delete OK?. T ouch Ye s to delete the device. Deleting a paired device. # Never turn the unit off while the paired Blue- tooth telephone is being deleted. Using a Bluetooth device to pair (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) <QRB3126-A/N>52 En 52 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
If you cannot open the connection between your Bluetooth device and this unit from your Bluetooth device, you can use this function to establish a connection. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Special Device to select the spe- cial device. # Bluetooth devices that are difficult to establish a connection with are called special devices. If your Bluetooth device is listed as a special device, select the appropriate one. 3 T ouch the special device list to open the connection. This unit is now on standby for a connection with the Bluetooth device. # If five devices are already paired, Memory Full is displayed and pairing cannot be performed. In such cases, delete a paired device first. Refer to the previous page. 4 Use your Bluetooth device to establish a connection. The connection method is different depending on the Bluetooth device. Refer to the manual for your Bluetooth device to establish a con- nection. While connecting, Pair your phone is dis- played. If the connection is established, Paired is displayed. # If the connection fails, Error is displayed. In such cases, tr y again from the beginning. # The PIN code is set to 0000 as the default, but can be changed. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on the next page. Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) If this function is set to on, a connection be- tween your Bluetooth device and this unit will take place automatically as soon as the two devices are less than a few meters apart. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Auto Connect to turn automatic connection on. If your Bluetooth device is ready for a Blue- tooth wireless connection, a connection to this unit will automatically be established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch Auto Connect again. 3 T ur n your vehicle â s ACC switch off and on. Switching visible unit (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) This function sets whether or not to make this unit visible to the other device. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Visibility to select visibility off. ! T o turn visibility on, touch Visibility again. Displaying Bluetooth Device address (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) This unit displays its Bluetooth device ad- dress. <QRB3126-A/N>53 En 53 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Device Information to display de- vice information. The Bluetooth device address is displayed. Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) T o connect your Bluetooth device to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to enter a PIN code on your Bluetooth device to verify the connection. The default code is 0000 , but you can change it with this function. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch PIN Code Input to select PIN code input. 3 T ouch 1 to 0 to input pin code. 4 After inputting PIN code (up to 8 di- gits), store in this unit. Storing the PIN code in this unit. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) A Bluetooth wireless connection can be estab- lished from your phone by putting the unit into initiating a connection mode. Y ou may need to refer to the operation manual that came with your phone if you are unsure how to initiate a connection from your phone. 1 Put the unit in initiating a connection mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 Use a cellular phone to connect to this unit. # Operation varies depending on the type of cel- lular phone. # Y ou may need to enter the link code on your cellular phone to complete the connection. Registering a connecte d cellular phone (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) Y ou can register a phone that is temporaril y connected to this unit in order to take full ad- vantage of the features available with Blue- tooth wireless technology. Only one cellular phone can be registered. 1 Start registering a connected cellular phone. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 Use cellular phone to register to this unit. If registration is successful, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the se- lected assignment. # If the assignment is already taken, the device name will be displayed. T o replace an assignment with a new phone, first delete the current assign- ment. # If registration failed, the device name of the connected phone will not be displayed in the se- lected assignment. In such cases, return to step 1 and tr y again. <QRB3126-A/N>54 En 54 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
V oice recognition (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) If your cellular phone features voice recogni- tion technology , you can make a call by voice commands. ! Operation varies depending on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone for detailed instructions. 1 Start voice recognition. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 Say the name of your contact aloud. Connecting a Bluetooth audio player (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) A Bluetooth wireless connection can be estab- lished by putting the unit into initiating a con- nection mode. % Put the unit in initiating a connection mode. Refer to Bluetooth audio operations on page 33. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to this unit is automatically established. Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) If this function is set to on, a connection be- tween your Bluetooth device and this unit will take place automatically as soon as the two devices are less than a few meters apart. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 T ouch Auto Connect to turn automatic connection on. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. If your Bluetooth device is ready for a Blue- tooth wireless connection, a connection to this unit will automatically be established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch Auto Connect again. 2 T ur n your vehicle â s ACC switch off and on. Displaying Bluetooth Device address (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) This unit displays its Bluetooth Device ad- dress. % T ouch Device Information to display de- vice information. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. The Bluetooth Device address is displayed. <QRB3126-A/N>55 En 55 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Introduction of menu operations Audio Fader/Balance F/R 0 L/R 0 Super Bass On High Off L/R îÂÂ0 Graphic EQ Auto EQ Sonic Center Control Loudness Subwoofer 5 4 3 21 1 Display menus. Refer to Common operations for menu set- tings/lists on page 15. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the menu to be adjusted. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Video Setup Menu Refer to Setting up the DVD player on page 60. 2 Audio function menu Refer to Audio Adjustments on the next page. 3 System menu Refer to System settings on page 64. 4 Entertainment menu Refer to Entertainment se ttings on page 69. 5 Custom menu Y ou can choose menus within each menu (Audio function menu, etc.) and register them to this custom menu. Refer to Customizing menus on page 70. Notes ! Y ou can display the Video Setup menu when a Disc, USB or SD source is selected. ! If you start the Video Setup menu, playback is stopped. ! Y ou cannot display the Audio function menu when the mute function is on or a JPEG file is playing. <QRB3126-A/N>56 En 56 Section 15 Menu operations
Audio Adjustments Note When selecting FM as the source, you cannot switch to Source Level Adjuster. Using fade r/balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting to provide an ideal listening environment for all of the occupied seats. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on the previous page. 2 T ouch Fader/Balance on the audio func- tion menu. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the front/rear speaker balance. Range: Front:15 to Rear:15 # Select F/R: 0 L/R: 0 when only using two speakers. # The front/rear speaker balance cannot be ad- justed when the rear output setting is Subwoofer . Refer to Setting the r ear output and subwoofer controller on page 64. 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the left/right speaker balance. Range: Left:15 to Right:15 Using the equalizer Y ou can adjust the equalization to match the car âÂÂs interior acous tic characteristics as de- sired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves. Display Equalizer curve Powerful P ower ful Natural Natural Display Equalizer curve V ocal V ocal Custom1 Custom 1 Custom2 Custom 2 Flat Flat Super Bass Super bass ! The equalizer cur ves for Custom1 and Custom2 can be adjusted. ! Y ou cannot select Custom1 and Custom2 when using the auto-equalizer . ! When Flat , no changes are made to the sound. Y ou can check the effects of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and another equalizer cur ve. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on the previous page. 2 T ouch Graphic EQ on the audio function menu. # Y ou can select Graphic EQ when Auto EQ function is off . 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired item. Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂCustom1 â Custom2 âÂÂFlat âÂÂSuper Bass Adjusting the 8-band graphic equalizer Y ou can adjust the level of each band for the equalizer curves. ! A separate Custom1 cur ve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments when a cur ve other than Custom2 is se- lected, the equalizer cur ve settings will be stored in Custom1. ! A Custom2 cur ve that is common for all sources can be created. If you make adjust- ments when the Custom2 cur ve is se- lected, the Custom2 cur ve will be updated. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on the previous page. <QRB3126-A/N>57 En 57 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
2 T ouch Graphic EQ on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired item. Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂCustom1 â Custom2 âÂÂFlat âÂÂSuper Bass 4 T ouch the Equalizer band to adjust. 5 T ouch a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Range: 12dB to â 12dB # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is an equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto EQ (refer to Auto EQ (auto -equaliz- ing) on page 66). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . If you connect an optional microphone to this unit, you can use this function. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Auto EQ to turn the auto-equali- zer on or off. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto EQ has not been carried out. Using sonic center control Sound that is suited for the listening position can easily be created with this function. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Sonic Center Control on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select a listening posi- tion. Range: Left:7 to Right:7 Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-frequency ranges at low volume. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Loudness on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. Off (off) âÂÂLow (low) âÂÂMid (mid) âÂÂHigh (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off. ! The cut-off frequency and output level can be adjusted when the subwoofer output is on. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Subwoofer on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch On or Off next to Subwoofer to turn the subwoofer output on or off. 4 T ouch Normal or Reverse next to Phase to select the phase of subwoofer output. 5 T ouch c or d next to Level to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . Range: 6 to â 24 6 T ouch c or d next to Frequency to se- lect the cut-off frequency . 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo - fer . <QRB3126-A/N>58 En 58 Section 15 Menu operations
Boosting the bass Y ou can boost the bass level. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. Range: 0 to 6 Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch c or d next to Frequency to se- lect cut-off frequency . Off (off) âÂÂ50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz â 100Hz â 125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels With SL A (source level adjustment), the vo - lume levels of each source can be adjusted to prevent significant differences between sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 3 T ouch Source Level Adjuster on the audio function menu. 4 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Range: 4 to â 4 Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with this function. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are automatically set to the same source level adjustment volume. ! iP od and USB storage device are automati- cally set to the same source level adjustment volume. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are automa- tically set to the same source level adjustment volume. <QRB3126-A/N>59 En 59 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
Setting up the DVD player Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. When available, the subtitles will be displayed in the selected language. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Subtitle Language on the Video Setup menu. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 3 T ouch the desired language. The subtitle language is set. # If you have selected Others, refer to When you select Others on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not available, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching the icon during playback. (Refer to Playing moving images on page 18.) ! The setting made here will not be affected even if the subtitle language is switched dur- ing playback using Subtitle. When you select Others A language code input display is shown when Others is selected. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 103. 1 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the entered numbers, touch C . 2 Registering the code. Registering the code. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Audio Language on the Video Setup menu. An audio language menu is displayed. 3 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected Others, refer to When you select Others on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not available, the language specified on the disc is used. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching Audio during playback. (Refer to Playing moving images on page 18.) ! The setting made here will not be affected even if the audio language is switched during playback using Audio. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language in which the menus recorded on a disc are displayed. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Menu Language on the Video Setup menu. A menu language menu is displayed. 3 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected Others, refer to When you select Others on this page. Note If the selected language is not available, the lan- guage specified on the disc is displayed. Setting the multi-angle DVD display The angle icon can be set so it appears on scenes where the angle can be switched. <QRB3126-A/N>60 En 60 Section 15 Menu operations
1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Multi Angle on the Video Setup menu to tur n angle icon display on or off. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display : a wide screen display that has a width-to-height ratio (TV as- pect ratio) of 16:9, and regular display that has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to V OUT . ! When using regular display, select either Letter Box or Pan Scan . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you selec t the TV aspect ratio, the unit âÂÂs display will change to the same setting. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch TV Aspect on the Video Setup menu to select the TV aspect ratio. T ouch TV Aspect repeatedly until the desired aspect ratio appears. ! 16 : 9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as is (initial setting) ! Letter Box â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands on the top and bottom of the screen ! Pan Scan â The picture is cut short on the right and left sides of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify Pan Scan , the disc is played back in Letter Box display even if you select the Pan Scan setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. ! The TV aspect ratio cannot be changed for some discs. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs in- structions. Setting the slide show interval JPEG files can be viewed as a slide show on this unit. In this setting, the inter val between each image can be set. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Time Per Photo Slide on the Video Setup menu to select the slide show interval. T ouch Time Per Photo Slide repeatedly until the desired setting appears. ! 5sec â JPEG images switch at inter vals of 5 seconds ! 10sec â JPEG images switch at inter vals of 10 seconds ! 15sec â JPEG images switch at inter vals of 15 seconds ! Manual â JPEG images can be switched manually Setting parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set paren- tal lock to the desired level. ! When you have a parental lock level set and play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In such cases, playback will begin when the correct code number is entered. Setting the code number and level A code number must be registered in order to play back discs with parental lock. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Parental on the Video Setup menu. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the entered numbers, touch C . <QRB3126-A/N>61 En 61 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
4 Registering the code. Registering the code. The code number is set, and the level can now be set. 5 T ouch 1 to 8 to select the desired level. 6 T ouch Enter. The parental lock level is set. ! 8 â Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting) ! 7 to 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is stored on the disc. Look for the level indication written on the disc package, included literature or on the disc itself . P arental lock of this unit is not pos- sible if a parental lock level is not stored on the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only for certain levels of scenes. The play- back of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the disc. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Parental on the Video Setup menu. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the registered code number . 4 Registering the code. Registering the code. This sets the code number , and the level can now be changed. # If you enter an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and enter the correct code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 5 T ouch 1 to 8 to select the desired level. 6 T ouch Enter. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Press RESET. Setting the DivX subtitle file Y ou can select whether or not to display DivX external subtitles. ! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when Custom is selected if no DivX exter- nal subtitle files exist. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DivX Subtitle on the Video Setup menu to select the desired subtitle setting. ! Original â Display the DivX subtitles ! Custom â Display the DivX external subti- tles Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more than 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be displayed. <QRB3126-A/N>62 En 62 Section 15 Menu operations
Displaying the DivX â VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) contents on this unit, the unit must first be re- gistered with a DivX VOD contents provider . F or registration, generate a DivX VOD registra- tion code and submit it to your provider . ! Keep a record of the code as you will need it when you register your unit to the DivX VOD provider . 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DivX VOD on the Video Setup menu. Registration Code and Deregistration Code appear . 3 T ouch Registration Code. Y our registration code is displayed. Displaying the deregistration code If your device is already activated, deregister it by entering the deregistration code. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DivX VOD on the Video Setup menu. 3 T ouch Deregistration Code. # T o cancel deregistration, touch Cancel. 4 T ouch OK. The deregistration is complete. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with a DVD menu is in- serted, this unit will cancel the menu automa- tically and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DVD Auto Play to turn automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch DVD Auto Play again. <QRB3126-A/N>63 En 63 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
System settings Switching the auxiliary setting Activate this setting when using an auxiliar y device connected to this unit. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch AUX Input on the system menu to tur n AUX Input on or off. Setting A V input Activate this setting when using an external video component connected to this unit. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch A V Input on the system menu to turn A V Input on or off. Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( Full) or subwoofer ( Subwoofer) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to Subwoofer, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub- woofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for a rear full-range speaker connection ( Full ). 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Rear Speaker on the system menu to switch the subwoofer output or full-range speaker . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select Full (full-range speaker). # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select Subwoofer (subwoofer). Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there will be no output unless you turn the subwoofer out- put on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 58). ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in the audio menu will return to the factor y settings. ! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Switching sound muting/ attenuation Sound from this system is automatically muted or attenuated when a signal from equipment with a mute function is received. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Mute/A TT until the desired set- ting appears. T ouch Mute/A TT until the desired setting ap- pears in the display. ! Mute â Muting ! AT T â 20dB â Attenuation ( AT T â 20dB has a stronger effect than AT T â 10dB) ! AT T â 10dB â Attenuation ! Off â T urns the sound muting/attenuation off <QRB3126-A/N>64 En 64 Section 15 Menu operations
Notes ! When Mute is displayed, the sound is turned off and no audio adjustments can be made. ! When AT T is displayed, the sound is attenu- ated and only the volume can be adjusted. (No other audio adjustments can be made.) ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Selecting the menu language The menu language can be selected from four languages. If text information such as the title name, artist name or a comment is embedded in a Eur- opean language, they can also be displayed on this unit. ! The language can be changed for the fol- lowing: â System menu â Video Setup â On-screen display â Multi language setting for DivX â Language for cautions Some operations on this unit are prohib- ited from use while driving or require careful attention when operated. In such cases, a caution will appear on the display . Y ou can change the language for caution messages with this setting. ! If the embedded language and the selected language setting are not the same, text in- formation may not display properly . ! Some characters may not be displayed properly . 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch System Language on the system menu to select the desired language. 3 T ouch the desired language. English (English) âÂÂFrançais (F rench) â Español (Spanish) âÂÂPortuguês (Portuguese) Clearing Bluetooth memory (AVH-P3300BT only) Important Never turn the unit off while the Bluetooth mem- ory is being cleared. 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Bluetooth Memory Clear on the system menu. 4 T ouch Clear. After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch OK to delete the mem- or y. # If you do not want to clear the memor y , touch Cancel . Updating Bluetooth connection software (AVH-P3300BT only) This function is used to update this unit with the latest software. For information on the soft- ware and updating, refer to our website. Important Never turn the unit off and never disconnect the phone while the software is being updated. 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Bluetooth Software Update. 4 T ouch Start to display the data transfer mode. # Follow the on-screen instructions to finish up- dating the software. <QRB3126-A/N>65 En 65 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
Displaying the Bluetooth system version (AVH-P3300BT only) If this unit fails to operate properly , you may need to consult your dealer for repair . In such cases, you may be asked to specif y the system version. Perform the following procedure to check the version on this unit. 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Bluetooth Version Information to display to the version of the Bluetooth module of this unit. Setting the rear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror-reve rsed images. Otherwise, the screen image will appear re- versed. This unit features a function that automatically switches to the rear view camera video ( R.C IN ) when a rear view camera is installed on your car and the gear shift is moved to the RE- VERSE (R) position. (For more details, con- sult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shift to REVERSE (R) and confirm that the rear view camera video is shown on the display . ! Change this setting if the display switches to the rear view camera video by error while you are driving for ward. ! T o stop watching the rear view camera video and return to the source display , press and hold MUTE. ! T ouch the RearView source icon to display the rear view camera image while driving. T ouch the source icon again to turn the rear view camera off . For details, refer to Se- lecting a sour ce using the touch panel k eys on page 13. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Camera Polarity on the system menu to select the appropriate setting. ! Battery â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Ground â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Off â When a rear view camera is not con- nected to this unit Setting the video signal When you connect this unit to an AV equip- ment to this unit, select the suitable video sig- nal setting. ! As this function is initially set to Auto, the unit will automatically adjust the video sig- nal setting. ! Y ou can operate this function only for the video signal input into the AV input. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Video Signal Setting on the func- tion menu. Video Signal Setting items are displayed. ! AV â Adjusts the AV video signal ! AUX â Adjusts the AUX video signal ! Camera â Adjusts the rear view camera video signal 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired video signal appears. Auto â PA L âÂÂNTSC âÂÂP AL-M âÂÂP AL-N â SECAM Auto EQ (auto-equalizing) The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car âÂÂs interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates an auto-equalizer cur ve based on that information. <QRB3126-A/N>66 En 66 Section 15 Menu operations
WARNING As a loud tone (noise) may be emitted from the speakers when measuring the car's interior acoustic characteristics, never per form auto T A or auto EQ while driving. CAUTION ! Thoroughly check the conditions before per- forming auto EQ as the speakers may be da- maged if these functions are per formed when: â The speakers are incorrectly connected. (F or example, when a rear speaker is con- nected as a subwoofer output.) â A speaker is connected to a power amp de- livering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capability. ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in batter y drainage. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified location. Before operating the auto EQ function ! Carr y out auto EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air condi- tioning switched off. Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car before carr ying out auto EQ. Sounds other than the mea- surement tone (surrounding sounds, en- gine sound , telephones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car in- terior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto EQ using the op- tional microphone. Using another micro- phone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car inter- ior acoustic characteristics. ! In order to per form auto EQ, the front speaker must be connected. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto EQ may not be possible if the power amp âÂÂs input level is set below the standard level. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn this LPF off before per forming auto EQ. Also set the cut- off fre- quency for the built-in LPF of an active sub- woofer to the highest frequency . ! The distance has been calculated by com- puter to be the optimum delay to give accu- rate results for the circumstances, so please continue to use this value. â The reflected sound within the car is strong and delays occur . â The LPF on active subwoofers or exter- nal amps delay the lower sounds. ! Auto EQ changes the audio settings as fol- lows: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to Using fader/ balance adjustment on page 57.) â The equalizer curve switches to Flat . (Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 57.) â The front, center and rear speakers will automatically be adjusted to a high pass filter setting. ! Previous settings for auto EQ will be over- written. Performing auto EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is quiet, close all the doors, windows and sun roof, and then tur n the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto EQ. 2 Fix the optional microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward. The auto EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto EQ. <QRB3126-A/N>67 En 67 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto EQ. 4 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 5 T ouch Auto EQ Measurement to enter auto EQ measurement mode. 6 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on this unit. (AVH-P4300DVD) (AVH-P3300BT) 7 T ouch Start to start auto EQ. 8 When the 10-second countdown starts, get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds. A measurement tone (noise) is emitted from the speakers, and auto EQ measurement be- gins. When auto EQ is completed, Complete is dis- played. When the car âÂÂs interior acoustic characteris- tics cannot be measured correctly , an error message will be displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto EQ error messages on page 92.) # It takes about nine minutes for auto EQ mea- surement to be completed when all the speakers are connected. # T o stop auto EQ, touch Stop . # T o cancel auto EQ measurement mode during this procedure, touch the following touch panel key . Canceling auto EQ measurement mode. 9 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or another safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sun- light for an extended period, high tempera- tures may cause distortion, color change or malfunction. 10 Press h(eject) to close the panel. (AVH-P4300DVD only) Note (AVH-P4300DVD ) Do not press h (eject) to open or close the panel when you are using the microphone. <QRB3126-A/N>68 En 68 Section 15 Menu operations
Entertainment settings Selecting the illumination color This unit is equipped with multiple-color illu- mination. Direct selection from preset illumination colors Y ou can select an illumination color from the color list. 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Appearance. 3 T ouch Illumination and then touch a color on the list. Customizing the illumination color 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Appearance. 3 T ouch Illumination and then touch Custom. 4 Display the customizing menu. Displaying the customizing menu. 5 T ouch the color bar to customize the color . 6 T ouch c or d to fine-tune the color . 7 T ouch the icon and hold to store the customized color in the memory . Memo Storing the customized color in the memor y . The customized color has been stored in the memor y . The set color will be recalled from the memory the next time you touch the same icon. Selecting the OSD color The OSD color can be changed. 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Appearance. 3 T ouch Screen. 4 T ouch one of the colors on the list. Selecting the background display Y ou can switch the background that is dis- played when listening to a source. 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Background. 3 T ouch the desired setting. # If no JPEG images are stored in this unit, you cannot select photo. T o store a JPEG image to this unit, refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 43. <QRB3126-A/N>69 En 69 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
Customizing menus 1 Display menu columns to register . Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. Y ou can customize menus except Video Setup menu. 2 T ouch and hold the menu column to register it. # T o cancel registration, touch and hold the menu column again. 3 Display the custom menu and choose a registered menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. Note Y ou can register up to 12 columns. <QRB3126-A/N>70 En 70 Section 15 Menu operations
Changing the picture adjustment Y ou can adjust the Brightness (brightness), Contrast (contrast), Color (color) , Hue (hue), Dimmer (dimmer), T emperature (tempera- ture), Black Level (black level) and RGB Dot Adjust (RGB dot clock adjustment) for each source and rear view camera. ! Y ou cannot adjust Color, Hue, Contrast and Black Level for the audio source. 1 Press and hold MENU to display Picture Adjustment. The adjustment function names are displayed. 2 If you are adjusting the Picture Adjustment, select the unit. NAVI Adjusting the Picture Adjustmen t for the Navigation unit. Rear View Adjusting the Picture Adjustmen t for the rear view camera. Source Adjusting the Picture Adjustmen t for the source. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. Picture Adjustment items are displayed. ! Brightness â Adjusts the black intensity ! Contrast â Adjusts the contrast ! Color â Adjusts the color saturation ! Hue â Adjusts the tone of color (red or green is emphasized) ! Dimmer â Adjusts the brightness of the dis- play ! T emperature â Adjusts the color tempera- ture, resulting in a better white balance ! Black Level â Emphasizes the dark portions of images making the difference between bright and dark more distinct ! RGB Dot Adjust â Adjusts phase shifting by dot clock when a Navigation unit is con- nected # Y ou cannot adjust the picture adjustment for the rear view camera when Camera Polarity is set to Off. (Refer to Setting the rear view camera (back up camera) on page 66.) # Y ou can adjust Hue only when the color sys- tem is set to NTSC. # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d, the level of the selected item increases or decreases. # Dimmer can be adjusted from 1 to 48 . # T emperature can be adjusted from 3 to âÂÂ3 . 5 T ouch Black Level and RGB Dot Adjust to adjust. # Black Level can be set on or off . # RGB Dot Adjust can be set to 1 or 2 . Notes ! Y ou cannot operate this function while driving. ! Different Brightness/ Contrast/ Dimmer set- tings can be set for when the illumination switch is on and when it is off . Setting rear monitor output The output source for the rear monitor can be switched to the following: ! Front â The source on the front screen of this unit Disc â The video and sound from the DVD AV â The video and sound from AV input AUX â The source for AUX input Off â No source Note Y ou cannot play DivX files on the rear and front monitors at the same time. <QRB3126-A/N>71 En 71 Section 16 Other Functions Other Functions
Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po - sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! T ouch the screen gently for adjustment. F orcefully pressing the touch panel may da- mage the touch panel. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or me- chanical pen. Doing so may damage the screen. ! If the touch panel cannot be adjusted prop- erly , consult your local P ioneer dealer . 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Press and hold MENU to display Picture Adjustment. 3 Press and hold MENU to start T ouch Panel Calibration. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 4 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold MENU . 5 Press MENU to complete 4-point adjust- ment. Data for the adjusted position is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while the data is being saved. 6 Press MENU to proceed to 16-point ad- justment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold MENU . 7 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen. After you touch all the marks, the data for the adjusted position is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while the data is being saved. 8 Press and hold MENU to complete the adjustment. Using an AUX source A separately sold auxiliar y device such as a VCR or portable device can be connected to this unit. When connected, the auxiliar y device is automatically recognized as an AUX source and is assigned to AUX. About AUX connection methods Y ou can connect auxiliar y devices to this unit. Mini pin plug cable ( AUX) When connecting an auxiliar y device using a mini plug cable iP ods and portable audio/video players can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iPod with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (such as the CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the connected iP od. ! A portable audio/video player can be con- nected by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) with an RCA cable (sold separately). However , depending on the cable, a reverse connec- tion between the red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable may be re- quired in order for the sound and video image to be reproduced correctly . <QRB3126-A/N>72 En 72 Section 16 Other Functions
% Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. Refer to Installation on the next page. Refer to What âÂÂs what on page 11. Using an exter nal unit An external unit refers to a Pioneer product, such as those which will be available in the fu- ture. Althou gh incompatible as a source, the basic functions of up to two external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external units are automatically allocated to external unit 1 or ex- ternal unit 2. The basic operations of the external unit are explained below . The allocated functions will differ depending on the connected external unit. For details concerning these functions, refer to the owner âÂÂs manual for the external unit. Basic operations The functions allocat ed to the following opera- tions will differ depending on the connected external unit. For details concerning these functions, refer to the owner âÂÂs manual for the connected external unit. Auto Switching to auto or manual. Audio Vide o Switching to video and audio. Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide scr een mode on page 43. Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto-equalizer on page 58. Actions will differ depe nding on the connected external unit. F1 F2 F3 F4 F unction 1 to 4 Actions will differ depe nding on the connected external unit. Using the functions allocated to 1 to 6 keys. Actions will differ depe nding on the connected external unit. <QRB3126-A/N>73 En 73 Section 16 Other Functions Other Functions
Connecting the units WARNING ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, no viewing of front seat video should ever occur while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where they are visi- bly distracting to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply, they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. CAUTION ! PIONEER does not recommend that you in- stall or ser vice your display unit yourself . In- stalling or ser vicing the product may expose you to risk of electric shock or other hazards. Refer all installation and ser vicing of your dis- play unit to authorized Pioneer ser vice person- nel. ! Secure all wiring with cable clamps or electri- cal tape. Do not allow any bare wiring to re- main exposed. ! Do not drill a hole into the engine compart- ment to connect the yellow cable of the dis- play unit to the vehicle batter y . Engine vibration may eventually cause the insulation to fail at the point where the wire passes from the passenger compartment into the engine compartment. T ake extra care in securing the wire at this point. ! It is extremely dangerous to allow the micro- phone lead to become wound around the steering column or gearstick. Be sure to in- stall the unit in such a way that it will not ob- struct driving. ! Make sure that cables will not inter fere with moving parts of the vehicle, such as the gear- shift, parking brake or seat sliding mechan- ism. ! Do not shorten any cables. If you do, the pro- tection circuit may fail to work properly. WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWITCH . IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. WARNING ! Use speakers over 50 W (output value) and be- tween 4 W to 8 W (impedance value). Do not use 1 W to 3 W speakers for this unit. ! The black cable is ground. When installing this unit or power amp (sold separately), make sure to connect the ground wire first. Ensure that the ground wire is properly connected to metal parts of the car âÂÂs body. The ground wire of the power amp and the one of this unit or any other device must be connected to the car separately with different screws. If the screw for the ground wire loosens or falls out, it could result in fire, generation of smoke or malfunction. Ground wir e Metal parts of carâ s body POWER AMP Other devices (Another electronic device in the car) <QRB3126-A/N>74 En 74 Section 17 Installation
Important ! This unit cannot be installed in a vehicle with- out ACC (accessor y) position on the ignition switch. O N S T A R T O F F ACC position No ACC position ! Use this unit with a 12-volt batter y and nega- tive grounding only . F ailure to do so may result in a fire or malfunction. ! T o prevent a short-circuit, overheating or mal- function, be sure to follow the directions below . â Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before installation. â Secure the wiring with cable clamps or ad- hesive tape. Wrap adhesive tape around wiring that comes into contact with metal parts to protect the wiring. â Place all cables away from moving parts, such as the gear shift and seat rails. â Place all cables away from hot places, such as near the heater outlet. â Do not connect the yellow cable to the bat- tery by passing it through the hole to the engine compartment. â Cover any disconnected cable connectors with insulating tape. â Do not shorten any cables. â Never cut the insulation of the power cable of this unit in order to share the power with other devices. The current capacity of the cable is limited. â Use a fuse of the rating prescribed. â Never wire the negative speaker cable di- rectly to ground. â Never band together negative cables of multiple speakers. ! When this unit is on, control signals are sent through the blue/white cable. Connect this cable to the system remote control of an exter- nal power amp or the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). If the vehicle is equipped with a glass anten- na, connect it to the antenna booster power supply terminal. ! Never connect the blue/white cable to the power terminal of an external power amp. Also, never connect it to the power terminal of the auto antenna. Doing so may result in bat- tery drain or a malfunction. ! IP -BUS connectors are color-coded. Be sure to connect connectors of the same color . <QRB3126-A/N>75 En 75 Section 17 Installation Installation
Connecting the power cord ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª Y ellow Connect to the constant 12 V supply terminal. F use resistor Red Connect to terminal controlled by ignition switch (12 V DC). Black (chassis ground) Connect to a clean, paint-free metal location. Left Right F ront speaker F ront speaker Rear speaker or Subwoofer (4 é) White Gray Gray/black White/black Green Violet Green/black Violet/black Violet Violet/black Not used. Green Green/black When using a subwoofer of 70 W (2 é), be sure to connect with Violet and Violet/black leads of this unit. Do not connect anything to Green and Green/black leads. Subwoofer (4 é ) à2 Rear speaker or Subwoofer (4 é) F use (10 A) Orange/white Connect to lighting switch terminal. F use resistor Microphone input (AVH-P3300BT only) This product (AVH-P4300DVD only) Antenna input AUX jack (3.5 ø) (A VH-P4300DVD only) Use a mini plug cable to connect with auxiliary device. RGB input Navigation unit can be connected (AVIC-U220(sold separately)). Please contact your dealer to inquire about the connectable navigation unit. Insert the 26 pin cable in the direction indicated in the figure. 26 pin cable (Supplied with Navigation unit) <QRB3126-A/N>76 En 76 Section 17 Installation
Connection method 1. Clamp the lead. 2. Clamp firmly with needle-nosed pliers. Note: ÷ The position of the parking brake switch depends on the vehicle model. F or details, consult the vehicle Owner âÂÂs Manual or dealer . Y ellow/black If you use an equipment with Mute function, wire this lead to the Audio Mute lead on that equipment. If not, keep the Audio Mute lead free of any connections. Light green Used to detect the ON/OFF status of the parking brake. This lead must be connected to the power supply side of the parking brake switch. Blue/white Connect to system control terminal of the power amp or auto-antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). Ground side P ower supply side P arking brake switch F use resistor With a 2 speaker system, do not connect anything to the speaker leads that are not connected to speakers. Note: ÷ Change the initial setting of this unit. The subwoofer output of this unit is monaural. Violet/white Of the two lead wires connected to the back lamp, connect the one in which the voltage changes when the gear shift is in the REVERSE (R) position. This connection enables the unit to sense whether the car is moving forwards or backwards. Microphone (AVH-P3300BT only) 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.) Wired remote input Hard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). <QRB3126-A/N>77 En 77 Section 17 Installation Installation
When connecting to separately sold power amp ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª Connect with RCA cables (sold separately) Rear speaker Perform these connections when using the optional amplifier . System remote control F ront speaker F ront speaker Lef t Right Rear speaker P ower amp (sold separately) P ower amp (sold separately) P ower amp (sold separately) Subwoofer Subwoofer T o front output T o rear output T o subwoofer output Blue/white Connect to system control terminal of the power amp or auto-antenna relay control terminal. (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). This product Rear output F ront output Subwoofer output (AVH- P4300DVD only) <QRB3126-A/N>78 En 78 Section 17 Installation
Connecting the system (for A VH-P4300DVD model) Bluetooth adapte r (e.g. CD-BTB200) (sold separately) 1.5 m (4 ft. 11 in.) USB cable (Supplied with this unit) Connect to separately sold USB device. IP -BUS cable (Supplied with Bluetooth adapter) Black Microphone for hands-free phoning (supplied with Bluetooth adapter) This product IP -BUS input Wired remote input Hard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). Connecting the system (for A VH-P3300BT model) HD Radio tuner (sold separately) T his product Wired remote input Hard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). IP -BUS cable (Supplied with HD Radio tuner) IP -BUS input <QRB3126-A/N>79 En 79 Section 17 Installation Installation
When connecting with optional CD-IU200V cable (A VH-P4300DVD only) This product Wired remote input H ard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). Dock connector Interface cable (CD-IU200V) (sold separately) iP od with video capabilities (sold separately) IP -BUS cable (Supplied with Bluetooth adapter) Black Bluetooth adapte r (e.g. CD-BTB200) (sold separately) Microphone for hands-free phoning (supplied with Bluetooth adapter) IP -BUS input USB input AUX input ( AUX ) USB cable (Supplied with this unit) 1.5 m (4 ft. 11 in.) <QRB3126-A/N>80 En 80 Section 17 Installation
When connecting the external video component and the display (AVH-P4300DVD only) External video component (sold separately) Audio inputs ( L IN, R IN) Display with RCA input jacks (sold separately) T o video input T o video output T o audio outputs T o audio inputs T his product Mini pin plug cable (sold separately) RCA cables (sold separately) Rear audio output ( REAR AUDIO OUT) Rear monitor output ( V OUT ) Video input ( V IN) ! It is necessar y to change AV Input in System Menu when connecting the exter- nal video component. When using a display connected to rear video output This product âÂÂs rear video output and rear audio output are for connection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD, etc. WARNING ! Never install the display in a location where it is visible to the driver while driving. <QRB3126-A/N>81 En 81 Section 17 Installation Installation
When connecting with a rear view camera When this product is used with a rear view camera, it is possible to automatically switch from the video to rear view image when the gear shift is moved to REVERSE (R). WARNING USE INPUT ONL Y FOR REVERSE OR MIR- ROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MA Y RESUL T IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION ! The screen image may appear reversed. ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur- poses. ! Objects in the rear view may appear closer or more distant than they actually are. T o video output Rear view camera (sold separately) Rear view camera input ( R.C IN) Violet/white Of the two lead wires connected to the back lamp, connect the one in which the voltage changes when the gear shift is in the REVERSE (R) position. This connection enables the unit to sense whether the car is moving forwards or backwards. F use resistor This product RCA cable (sold separately) (AVH-P4300DVD only) CAUTION Y ou must use a camera which outputs mirror reversed images. It is necessar y to set Camera Polarity properly in System Menu when connecting the rear view camera. <QRB3126-A/N>82 En 82 Section 17 Installation
Installation Notes ! Check all connections and systems before final installation. ! Do not use unauthorized parts as this may cause malfunctions. ! Consult your dealer if installation requires dril- ling of holes or other modifications to the vehi- cle. ! Do not install this unit where: â it may inter fere with operation of the vehi- cle. â it may cause injury to a passenger as a re- sult of a sudden stop. ! Do not install the display where it may (i) ob- struct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the per for- mance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs operating systems or safety features, including air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely operate the vehicle. ! The semiconductor laser will be damaged if it overheats. Install this unit away from hot places such as near the heater outlet. ! Optimum performance is obtained when the unit is installed at an angle of less than 30ð. ! T o ensure proper heat dispersal when using this unit, make sure you leave ample space behind the rear panel and wrap any loose cables so they are not blocking the vents when installing the unit. 5 cm cm Leave ample space 5 cm 5 cm ! T o some types of vehicles, this unit cannot be properly installed. In such case, use the op- tional installation kit (ADT - VA133). Installation using the screw holes on the side of the unit % Fastening the unit to the factory radio- mounting bracket. P osition the unit so that its screw holes are aligned with the screw holes of the bracket, and tighten the screws at 3 or 4 locations on each side. <QRB3126-A/N>83 En 83 Section 17 Installation Installation
1 2 3 5 4 1 If the pawl gets in the way, bend it down. 2 Factory radio mounting bracket 3 Use either truss (5 mm ÃÂ 8 mm) or flush sur face (5 mm ÃÂ 9 mm) screws, depending on the bracket screw holes. 4 Frame In some types of vehicles, discrepancy may occur between the unit and the dashboard. If this happens, use the supplied frame to fill the gap. 5 Dashboard or console Installing the microphone (A VH-P3300BT only) CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to allow the micro- phone lead to become wound around the steer- ing column or gearstick. Be sure to install the unit in such a way that it will not obstruct driving. Note Install the microphone in a position and orienta- tion that will enable it to pick up the voice of the person operating the system. When installing the microphone on the sun visor 1 Install the microphone on the micro- phone clip. 1 2 1 Microphone 2 Microphone clip 2 Install the microphone clip on the sun visor . With the sun visor up, install the microphone clip. (Lowering the sun visor reduces the voice recognition rate.) <QRB3126-A/N>84 En 84 Section 17 Installation
1 2 1 Microphone clip 2 Clamp Use separately sold clamps to secure the lead where necessar y inside the vehicle. When installing the microphone on the steering column 1 Install the microphone on the micro- phone clip. 2 1 3 4 1 Microphone 2 Microphone base 3 Microphone clip 4 Fit the microphone lead into the groove. # Microphone can be installed without using microphone clip. In this case, detach the micro- phone base from the microphone clip. T o detach the microphone base from the microphone clip, slide the microphone base. 2 Install the microphone clip on the rear side of the steering column. 1 2 1 Double-sided tape 2 Clamp Use separately sold clamps to secure the lead where necessar y inside the vehicle. Adjusting the microphone angle The microphone angle can be adjusted. <QRB3126-A/N>85 En 85 Section 17 Installation Installation
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) The power will not turn on. The unit will not operate. Leads and con- nectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connec- tions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the cause and then replace the fuse. Be sure to install a fuse with the same rating. Noise and/or other factors are causing the built- in microproces- sor to operate in- correctly. Press RESET .( P a g e 11) Operation with the remote control is not possible. The unit does not operate correctly even when the ap- propriate re- mote control buttons are pressed. Batter y power is low . Load a new batter y. Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. T r y operating with another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. The type of disc loaded cannot be played on this unit. Check the disc type. The disc loaded is not compatible with this video system. Change the disc to one that is compa- tible with your video system. There is no sound. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected cor- rectly . Connect the cables correctly. The unit is per- forming still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame- by-frame playback . Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) There is no image dis- played. The parking brake cable is not connected. Connect the park- ing brake cable, and apply the park- ing brake. The parking brake is not ap- plied. Connect the park- ing brake cable, and apply the park- ing brake. The icon is displayed, and operation is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the config- uration of the disc. This operation is not possible. The image dis- played stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. The data could no longer be read during play- back. Stop playback once, and start playback again. There is no sound. The volume level is low. The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . The sound and video skip. The unit is not firmly secured. Firmly secure the unit. File size and transmission rate are above recom- mended rates. Create a DivX file that is within the recommended size and transmission rate. The aspect ratio is incor- rect and the image is stretched. The aspect ratio setting is incor- rect for the dis- play . Select the appro- priate setting for your display. (P age 61) The motor sounds when the ignition switch is turned ON (or is turned to ACC). The unit is con- firming whether or not a disc is loaded. This is a normal operation. <QRB3126-A/N>86 En 86 Appendix Additional Information
Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) Nothing is dis- played. The touch panel keys can- not be used. The rear view camera is not connected. Connect a rear view camera. Camera Polarity is at incor rect setting. Press and hold MENU to return to the source display and then select the correct setting for Camera Polarity . (P age 66) No xxxx ap- pears when a display is chan- ged ( No Title, for example). There is no em- bedded text infor- mation. Switch the display or play another track/file. Sub-folders cannot be played back. Folder repeat play has been se- lected. Select the repeat range again. The repeat range changes automatically. Another folder was selected dur- ing repeat play. Select the repeat range again. T rack search or fast for ward/re- verse was per- formed during file repeat play. Select the repeat range again. DVD Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not possible. P arental lock is activated. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (Page 61) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Enter the correct code number . (P age 61) Y ou have forgot - ten your code number . Press RESET .( P a g e 62) Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) Dialog lan- guage (and subtitle lan- guage) cannot be switched. The DVD being played does not feature multiple language record- ings. The language can- not be switched if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch the lan- guage using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD being played does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch the lan- guage using the disc menu. Playback is not per formed with the audio lan- guage and sub- title language settings se- lected in Video Setup menu. The DVD being played does not feature dialog or subtitles in the selected lan- guage. The language can- not be switched if the selected lan- guage is not re- corded on the disc. The viewing angle cannot be switched. The DVD being played does not feature scenes shot from multi- ple angles. The viewing angle cannot be switched if the DVD does not fea- ture scenes re- corded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multi- angle viewing for a scene that was not recorded from multiple an- gles. Switch between multiple angles when watching scenes recorded from multiple an- gles. <QRB3126-A/N>87 En 87 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) The image is extremely un- clear/distorted and dark dur- ing playback. Some discs fea- ture a signal to prohibit copying. Since this unit is compatible with the analog copy generation man- agement system, when playing a disc that has a sig- nal prohibiting copying, horizontal stripes or other im- per fections may appear when viewed on some displays. This is not a malfunction. Video CD Symptom Cause Action The PBC (play- back control) menu cannot be called up. The Video CD being played does not feature PBC. This operation is not available for Video CDs that do not feature PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD being played fea- tures PBC. This operation is not available for Video CDs that fea- ture PBC. iPod Symptom Cause Action The iPod does not operate correctly. The cables are in- correctly con- nected. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. The iPod version is old. Update the iPod version. Bluetooth audio/telephone Symptom Cause Action The sound from the Blue- tooth audio source is not played back. There is a call in progress on a Bluetooth con- nected cellular phone. The sound will be played back when the call is termi- nated. A Bluetooth-con- nected cellular phone is cur- rently being oper- ated. Do not operate the cellular phone at this time. A call was made with a Bluetooth- connected cellu- lar phone and then immediately terminated. As a result, communi- cation between this unit and the cellular phone was not termi- nated properly. Reconnect the Bluetooth connec- tion between this unit and the cellu- lar phone. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to note the error message. T uner Message Cause Action No Data Pro- vided This unit cannot receive artist name/song title information. Move to the desir- able location with good reception. No Data This unit cannot receive program ser vice name in- formation. Move to the desir- able location with good reception. DVD Message Cause Action Different Re- gion Disc The disc does not have the same region number as this unit. Replace the DVD with one bearing the correct region number . <QRB3126-A/N>88 En 88 Appendix Additional Information
Message Cause Action Error -02-XX/ FF-FF The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. The disc is scratched. Replace the disc. The disc is loaded upside down. Check that the disc is loaded correctly. There is an elec- trical or mechan- ical error . Press RESET . Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played on this unit. Replace the disc with one that can be played on this unit. The inserted disc does not contain any playable files. Replace the disc. Protect All the files on the inserted disc are embedded with DRM. Replace the disc. Skipped The inserted disc contains DRM protected files. Play an audio file not embedded with Windows Media DRM 9/10. TEMP The temperature of the unit is out- side the normal operating range. W ait until the unit returns to a tem- perature within the normal operating limits. Rental Ex- pired. The inserted disc contains expired DivX VOD con- tent. Select a file that can be played. Video resolu- tion not sup- ported The inserted disc contains a high definition DivX file. Select a file that can be played. It is not possi- ble to write it in the flash. This unit âÂÂs flash memor y used as the temporar y storage area is full. Select a file that can be played. Y our device is not author- ized to play this DivX pro- tected video. This unit âÂÂs DivX registration code has not been authorized by the DivX VOD con- tents provider . Register this unit to the DivX VOD contents provider . Message Cause Action Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on this unit. Select a file that can be played. Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Video frame rate not sup- ported. DivX file âÂÂs frame rate is more than 30 fps. Select a file that can be played. Audio Format not sup- ported. This type of file is not supported on this unit. Select a file that can be played. External storage device (USB, SD) Message Cause Action Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on this unit. Select a file that can be played. There are no songs. T ransfer the audio files to the USB portable audio player/USB mem- or y and connect. Security for the connected USB memor y is en- abled. Follow the USB memor y instruc- tions to disable se- curity . Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Skipped The connected USB portable audio player/ USB memor y contains WMA files that are pro - tected by Windows Med- ia ä DRM 9/10. Play an audio file not embedded with Windows Media DRM 9/10. <QRB3126-A/N>89 En 89 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Message Cause Action Protect All the files on the connected USB portable audio player/ USB memor y are protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10. T ransfer audio files not protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and con- nect. Incompatible USB The USB device connected to is not supported by this unit. Connect a USB portable audio player or USB memor y that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant. The USB device is not formatted with FA T16 or FA T32. The connected USB device should be formatted with FA T16 or FA T32. Incompatible SD Unsupported SD card is inserted. Use the supported SD card. Non-compatible SD storage de- vice Remove your de- vice and replace it with a compatible SD storage device. Check USB The USB connec- tor or USB cable has short- circuited. Check that the USB connector or USB cable is not caught in some- thing or damaged. The connected USB portable audio player/ USB memor y consumes more than maximum allowable cur- rent. Disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and do not use it. T urn the ignition switch to OFF , then to ACC or ON and then connect a compli- ant USB portable audio player/USB memor y. Message Cause Action Error -02-9X/- DX Communication failed. Perform one of the following opera- tions. â T urn the ignition switch OFF and back ON. â Disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memor y. â Change to a dif- ferent source. Then, return to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y. Rental Ex- pired. The inserted ex- ternal storage de- vice contains expired DivX VOD content. Select a file that can be played. Video resolu- tion not sup- ported The inserted ex- ternal storage de- vice contains a high definition DivX file. Select a file that can be played. It is not possi- ble to write it in the flash. This unit âÂÂs flash memor y used as the temporar y storage area is full. Select a file that can be played. Y our device is not author- ized to play this DivX pro- tected video. This unit âÂÂs DivX registration code has not been authorized by the DivX VOD con- tents provider . Register this unit to the DivX VOD contents provider . Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Video frame rate not sup- ported. DivX file âÂÂs frame rate is more than 30 fps. Select a file that can be played. Audio Format not sup- ported. This type of file is not supported on this unit. Select a file that can be played. <QRB3126-A/N>90 En 90 Appendix Additional Information
iPod Message Cause Action Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Error -02-6X/- 9X/-DX Communication failed. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. iP od failure. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. Error -02-67 The iPod firm- ware version is old. Update the iPod version. Stop There are no songs. T ransfer songs to the iPod . There are no songs in the cur- rent list. Select a list that contains songs. Not Found No related songs. T ransfer songs to the iPod . iT unes tagging Message Cause Action iPod full. T ags not trans- ferred. Memor y used for tag information on the iPod is full. Sync the iPod with iT unes and clean up the tagged play- list. Memory full. T ags not stored. This unit âÂÂs flash memor y used as the temporar y storage area is full. Connect the iPod to this unit and transfer this unit âÂÂs tag information to the iPod . T ags trans- ferred failed. This unit âÂÂs tag in- formation cannot transfer to the iP od. Check the iPod and tr y again. T ag store failed. T ag information cannot be stored in this unit. T r y again. Message Cause Action Error -8D Built-in FLASH ROM encoun- tered an error T urn the ignition OFF and ON. SD source can- not be se- lected during tag transfer . T ag information is being trans- ferred to the iP od. W ait until tag transfer is com- plete. Bluetooth Message Cause Action Error -10 The power failed for the Bluetooth module of this unit. T urn the ignition switch OFF and then to ACC or ON. If the error mes- sage is still dis- played after per forming the above action, please contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Station. Pandora Message Cause Action Error -19 Communication failed. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. Start up the Pandora Ap- plication from your Device. The Pandora ap- plication has not started runnin g yet. Start up the P andora applica- tion from your iP od/iPhone. Unable to save thumb rating. T ry again later . Unable to save thumb rating. T r y again later . Unable to save Book- mark. T ry again later . Unable to save BookMark. T r y again later . Pandora sys- tem mainte- nance. T ry again later . P andora system is undergoing maintenance. T r y again later . Skip limit reached. Skip limit reached. Do not exceed the skip limit. <QRB3126-A/N>91 En 91 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Message Cause Action This version of the Pandora Ap- plication is not sup- ported. This version of the Pandora ap- plication is not supported. Connect an iPod/ iPhone that has a compatible version of the P andora ap- plication installed. Check Device Device error mes- sage displayed in P andora Applica- tion. Please check your iP od/iPhone. Pandora is un- able to play music. Please see your De- vice. Unable to play music from P andora. Please check your iP od/iPhone. Create station within the Pandora Ap- plication on Device. No station found. Create a station in the Pandora appli- cation on your iP od/iPhone. No Active Sta- tion No station se- lected. Select a station. Understanding auto EQ error messages When correct measurement of the car âÂÂs inter- ior acoustic characteristics is not possible using auto EQ, an error message may appear on the display. In such cases, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and how it may be corrected. After checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error . Please check MIC. The microphone is not connected. Plug the optional microphone se- curely into the jack. Message Cause Action Error . Please check xxxx speaker . The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are con- nected correctly. ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp con- nected to the speakers. ! Plug the micro - phone securely into the jack. Error . Please check noise. The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is quiet, and switch off the engine, air conditioner and heater . ! Set the micro - phone correctly. Error . Please check battery . P ower is not being supplied from the batter y to this unit. ! Connect the bat- tery correctly. ! Check the batter y voltage. Understanding messages Messages T ranslation Screen image may ap- pear reversed. Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror- reversed images. Otherwise, the screen image will appear re- versed. <QRB3126-A/N>92 En 92 Appendix Additional Information
Indicator list Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 1 Indicates that the selecte d fre- quency is being broadcast in stereo. Indicates that a Bluetoo th tele- phone is connected. Indicates that the digital format is Dolby Digital. Indicates that the digital format is MPEG Audio. Indicates that the digital format is Linear PCM. Indicates the sampling frequency. Indicates that the digital format is DTS. 1 1ch 2 ch Mch Indicates the audio channel. Indicates that a disc with PBC On is being played. ! Indicates that a cellular phone is connected. ! Indicates that an incoming call has been received and has not been checked yet. ! Not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. Indicates the batter y strength of the cellular phone. ! The level shown on the indica- tor may differ from the ac tual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displ ayed in the batter y strength indi ca- tor area. Indicates the signal streng th of the cellular phone. Indicates that Auto EQ is on. Shows when HD Radio signal is re- ceived. Shows when analog audio of HD Radio signal is received. Shows when digital audio of HD Radio signal is received. Shows when HD Radio station in- formation is received. Shows when downloadable song information (tag) from a radio sta- tion is received. Shows when song information (tag) from an HD Radio station is being saved to this unit. Shows while searching a song/ video in alphabet search mode. Shows when song information (tag) is being saved to your iPod . Shows when this unit has the song information (tag). Shows which audio language has been selected. <QRB3126-A/N>93 En 93 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Shows which subtitle language has been selected. Shows which viewing angle has been selected. Shows which audio output has been selected. Area 2 Shows the disc title of the CD text disc currently being played. Shows the song title when receiving the tag information. Shows the track title of the track cur- rently being played for CD text discs. Shows the song title of the song cur- rently being played for MP3/WMA/ AAC files. Shows the comment currently being played. Shows the station nam e currently tuned in to. Shows the artist name when receiv- ing the tag information. Shows the artist name of the track/ song currently being playe d for CD text discs. Shows the artist name of the artist currently being played for MP3/ WMA/AAC files. Shows cellular phone information. Shows genera l phone information. Shows home phone information. Shows office phone information. Shows other phone information. Shows the categor y name. Shows the folder nam e of the folder containing the MP3/WMA/AAC file currently being played. Shows the file nam e of the MP3/ WMA/AAC file currently being played. Shows the preset number of the sta- tion currently being tuned in to. CH Shows the channel curr ently being tuned in to. Shows SIRIUS information. Area 3 Shows the title number currently being played. Shows the chapter number cur- rently being played. Shows the replay time currently being played. Shows when the game alert func- tion is on while receiving SIRIUS stations. Shows the genre of the track/song currently being played. Indicates that the feature demo is on. <QRB3126-A/N>94 En 94 Appendix Additional Information
Handling guidelines Discs and player Use only discs featuring any of following logos. Use 12-cm discs. Do not use 8-cm discs or an adapter for 8-cm discs. Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/-RW) or CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or other wise damaged discs as they may damage the player . Unfinalized CD -R/CD-RW discs cannot be played back. Do not touch the recorded sur face of the discs. Store discs in their cases when not in use. Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemica ls to the sur face of the discs. T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a sof t cloth out- ward from the center . Condensation may temporarily impair the player âÂÂs per forma nce. Let it rest for about one hour to adjust to a warmer temperature. Also, wi pe any damp discs off with a sof t cloth. Playback of discs may not be possible because of disc characteristics, disc format, recorded applica- tion, playback environment, storage conditions, and so on. Road shocks may interrupt disc playback . Read the precautions for discs before using them. Certain funct ions may not be available for some DVD video discs. It may not be possible to play ba ck some DVD video discs. It is not possible to play back DVD -RAM discs. This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) for- mat. Do not insert AVCHD discs as you may not be able to eject the disc. External storage device (USB, SD) Depending on the exte rnal storage device (USB, SD), the following problems may occur . ! Operations may var y . ! The storage dev ice may not be recognize d. ! Files may not be played back properly. USB storage device Connections via USB hu b are not supported. Do not connect anything other than a USB storage device. Firmly secure the USB storage device when driving. Do not let the USB storage device fall onto the floor , where it may becom e jammed under the brake or ac- celerator pedal. Depending on the USB storage device, the device may cause noise to occur in the radio. Copyright protected files that are stored in the USB devices cann ot be playe d back. Y ou cannot connect a USB portable audio player/USB memor y to this unit via USB hub. P artitioned USB memor y is not compatible with this unit. Depending on the kind of USB portable audio playe r/ USB memor y you use, the device may not be recog- nized or audio files may not be played back properly. Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memor y in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. Doing so may cause the device to malfunction from the extreme rise in temp erature. <QRB3126-A/N>95 En 95 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
SD memory card This unit supports only the following types of SD memor y cards. ! SD ! SDHC Keep the SD memor y card out of the reach of chil- dren. Should the SD memor y card be swallowed, con- sult a doctor immediately. Do not touch the connectors of the SD memor y card directly with your fingers or with any metal device. Do not insert anything other than an SD memor y card into the SD card slot. If a metal object (such as a coin) is inserted into the slot, the internal circuits may break and cause malfun ctions. Do not insert a damaged SD memor y card (e.g. warped, label peeled off) as it may not be ejected from the slot. Do not tr y to force an SD memor y card into the SD card slot as the card or this unit may be damaged. When ejecting an SD memor y card, press it and hold it until it clicks. It is dangerous for you to release your finger immediately after you press on the card as the card may shoot out of the slot and hit you in the face, etc. If the card shoots out of the slot, it may become lost. iPod T o ensure proper operation, connect the dock connec- tor cable from the iPod directly to this unit. Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not let the iP od fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. About iPod settings ! When an iPod is conne cted, this unit changes the EQ (equalizer) setting of the iPod to off in order to optimize the acoustics. When you disconnect the iP od, the EQ returns to the original setting. ! Y ou cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod when using this unit. Repeat is automatical ly changed to All when the iPod is connected to this unit. Incompatible text saved on the iP od will not be dis- played by the unit. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs Unfinalized DVD -R/-RW discs which have been re- corded in the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back. Playback of DVD-R/DVD-RW discs may not be possi- ble, due to disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. Depending on the ap plication settings and the en vir- onment, playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possi- ble only for discs which have been finalized. Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer may not be pos- sible due to disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. Depending on the ap plication settings and the en vir- onment, playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossi- ble in case of direct exposu re to sunlight, high tem- peratures, or the storage conditions in the vehicle. Titles and other text information reco rded on a CD-R/ CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit (in the case of audio da ta (CD-DA)). DualDiscs DualDiscs are two-side d discs that have a recordabl e CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of DualDiscs is not physi- cally compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. F requent loading and ejecting of a DualDisc may re- sult in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback proble ms on this unit. In some cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in the disc load- ing slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recom- mend you refrain from using DualDisc wi th this unit. Please refer to the information from the disc manu- facturer for more detailed information about DualDiscs. <QRB3126-A/N>96 En 96 Appendix Additional Information
JPEG picture files JPEG is short for Joint Photograph ic Experts Group and refers to a still image compression technology standard. Files are compatible with Baseline JPE G and EXIF 2.1 still images up to a resolution of 8 192 à7 680. (EXIF format is used most commonly with digital still cam- eras.) Playback of EXIF format files that were processed by a personal computer may not be possible. There is no progres sive JPEG compatibility. DivX video files Depending on the compo sition of the file information, such as the number of audio streams or file size, there may be a slight delay when playing back discs. Some special operations may be prohibited due to the composition of the DivX files. Only DivX files down loaded from a DivX partn er site are guarantee for proper operation. Unauthorized DivX files may not operate properly . DRM rental files cannot be operated until playback is started. Recommended file size: 2 Mbps or less with a tran s- mission rate of 2 GB or less. The ID code of this unit must be registe red to a DivX VOD provider in order to playback DivX VOD file s. For information on ID codes, refer to Displayin g the DivX â VOD r egistration code on page 63. For more details ab out DivX, visit the following site: http://www .divx.com/ Important ! When naming a JPEG image file, add the cor- responding filename extension (.jpg, .jpeg, . jpe or .jfif). ! This unit plays back files with these filename extensions (.jpg, .jpeg, .jpe or .jfif) as a JPEG image file. T o prevent malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than JPEG image files. Compressed audio compatibility (disc, USB, SD) WMA File extension: .wma Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 48 kHz Windows Media Audio Professional, Lossles s, Voice/ DRM Stream/Stream with video: Not compatible MP3 File extension: .mp3 Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for emphasis) Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority over Version 1.x.) M3u playlist: Not compat ible MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: Not compat ible AAC Compatible forma t: AAC encoded by iT unes File extension: .m4a Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps Apple Lossless: Not compatible AAC file bought from the iT unes Store (.m4p file ex- tension): Not compatible DivX compatibility Compatible forma t: DivX video format implement ed in relation to DivX sta ndards File extensions: .avi or .divx DivX Ultra format: Not compatible DivX HD format: Not compatible DivX files without video data: Not compatible DivX plus: Not compatible Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital <QRB3126-A/N>97 En 97 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
LPCM: Not compatible Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 48 kHz Compatible externa l subtitle file extension: .srt Supplemental information Some characters in a file nam e (including the file ex- tension) or a folder name may not be displayed. This unit may not operate correctly dependi ng on the application used to encode WMA files. There may be a slight delay at the start of playback of audio files embedded with image data or audio files stored on an external storage device (USB/S D) that has numerous folder hierarchies. Disc Playable folders: up to 700 Playable files: up to 999 for CD-R/CD -RW Playable files: up to 3 500 for DVD-R/DVD -RW File system: ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF 1.02 (DVD-R/DVD -RW) Multi-session playback: Compatible P acket write data transfer: Not compatible Regardless of the length of blank sections between the songs from the original recording, compres sed audio discs play with a short pause between songs. External storage device (USB, SD) Playable folders: up to 6 000 Playable files: up to 65 535, up to 255 for one folder Playback of copyright-protected files: Not compatible P artitioned external storage device (USB, SD): Only the first playable partition can be played. There is no compatibil ity for Multi Media Cards (MMC). Compatibility with all SD memor y cards is not guaran- teed. This unit is not compatible with SD-Audio/S D- Video. CAUTION ! P ioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the USB memor y/USB portable audio player/SD memory card even if that data is lost while using this unit. ! Do not leave the discs/external storage device (USB, SD) or iP od in places with high temperatures. iPod compatibility This unit supports only the following iPod models. Supported iPod software versions are shown below . Older versions may not be supp orted. ! iPhone 4 (sof tware version 4.1) ! iPhone 3GS (sof tware version 4.1) ! iPhone 3G (sof tware version 4.1) ! iPhone (software version 3.1.3) ! iP od nano 5th generation (software version 1.0.2) ! iP od nano 4th generation (software version 1.0.4) ! iP od nano 3rd generation (software version 1.1.3) ! iP od nano 2nd generation (software version 1.1.3) ! iP od nano 1st generation (software version 1.3.1) ! iP od touch 3rd generation (software version 4.0) ! iP od touch 2nd generation (software version 4.0) ! iP od touch 1st generation (software version 3.1.3) ! iP od classic 160GB (soft ware version 2.0.4) ! iP od classic 120GB (soft ware version 2.0.1) ! iP od classic (software version 1.1.2) ! iP od 5th gen eration (software version 1.3) Depending on the gen eration or version of the iPod , some functions may not be available. Operations may var y depending on the software ver- sion of iP od. When using an iPod , an iP od Dock Conn ector to USB Cable is required. When you use Pioneer CD-IU50V/CD -IU200V inter face cable, consult your dealer for details. About the file/format compatibility, refer to the iPod manuals. Audio Book, Podcast: Compatible CAUTION P ioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the iPod , even if that data is lost while this unit is used. <QRB3126-A/N>98 En 98 Appendix Additional Information
Sequence of audio files The user cannot assign folder numbers and specify playback sequences with this unit. Example of a hierarchy î î î î î î Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 01 02 03 04 05 : Folder : Compressed audio file 01 to 05: Folder number 1 to 6 : Playback sequence Disc F older selection sequence or other operation may differ depending on the encoding or writ- ing software. External storage device (USB, SD) The playback sequence is the same as the re- corded sequence in the external storage de- vice (USB, SD). T o specify the playback sequence , the follow- ing method is recommended. 1 Create a file name that includes numbers that specify the playback sequence (e.g., 001xxx. mp3 and 099yyy.mp3). 2 Put those files into a folder . 3 Save the folder that contains the files to the external storage device (USB, SD). However , depending on the system environ- ment, you may not be able to specify the play- back sequence . F or USB portable audio players, the sequence is different and depends on the player . Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal inspec- tion, adjustments, or repairs. Handling the display ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch ea- sily . ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come very hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. Y ou should avoid exposing the display unit to direct sunlight as much as possible. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature range of âÂÂ10ðC to 60ðC (14 ðF to 140 ðF). At temperatures higher or lower than this operating temperature range, the display may not operate normally. ! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in- crease its visibility within the vehicle. Do not press it strongly on it as this may da- mage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as this may scratch it. <QRB3126-A/N>99 En 99 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cooler may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a malfunction. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna away from the display to prevent dis- ruption of the video image by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. LED (light-emitting diode) backlight ! At low temperatures, using the LED back- light may increase image lag and degrade the image quality due to the characteristics of the LCD screen. Image quality will im- prove with an increase in temperature. ! T o protect the LED backlight, the display will darken in the following environments: â In the direct sunlight â Near the heater vent ! The product lifetime of the LED backlight is more than 10 000 hours. However , it may decrease if used in high temperatures. ! If the LED backlight reaches the end of its product lifetime, the screen will become dark and the image will no longer be pro- jected. In such cases, please consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display, first turn the system power off, then wipe with a soft dr y cloth. ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Copyright an d trademark This item incorporates copy protection tech- nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disas- sembly are prohibited. Bluetooth The Bluetooth â word mark and logos are regis- tered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other trade- marks and trade names are those of their re- spective owners. ! Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio connectivity technology that is developed as a cable replacement for mobile phones, handheld PCs and other devices. Bluetooth operates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per second. Bluetooth was launched by a special interest group (SIG) that comprises of Ericsson Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., T oshiba and IBM in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly 2 000 companies worldwide. DVD video is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. iT unes Apple and iT unes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. <QRB3126-A/N>100 En 100 Appendix Additional Information
MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad- casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic con- tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An indepen- dent license for such use is required. For de- tails, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA Windows Media is either a registered trade- mark or trademark of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. SD memory card SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. iPod & iPhone iPhone , iPod , iPod classic, iP od nano, and iP od touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries. â Made for iPodâ and â Made for iPhone â mean that an electronic accessor y has been de- signed to connect specifically to iP od or iPhone , respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per formance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulator y standards. Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolby â and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DivX DivX â is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO : DivX â is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an of- ficial DivX Certified â device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND : This DivX Certified â device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-De- mand (VOD) movies. T o obtain your registra- tion code, locate the DivX VOD section in Menu operations . Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registra- tion. About the SA T RADIO READY mark The SA T RADIO READY mark indicates that the Satellite Radio T uner for Pioneer (i.e., XM tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately) can be controlled by this unit. Please inquire to your dealer or nearest authorized P ioneer ser vice station regarding the satellite radio tuner that can be connected to this unit. For satellite radio tuner operation, please refer to the satellite radio tuner owner âÂÂs manual. ! The system will use direct satellite-to-recei- ver broadcasting technology to provide lis- teners in their cars and at home with cr ystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satellite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital-quality music, news, sports, talk and children âÂÂs programming. ! â SA T Radio âÂÂ, the SA T Radio logo and all re- lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satel- lite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc. <QRB3126-A/N>101 En 101 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
HD Radio ä T echnology ! This HD Radio Ready receiver is ready to re- ceive HD Radio broadcasts when con- nected to the HD Radio tuner (e.g. GEX- P20HD), sold separately. HD Radio ä, HD Radio Ready ä, and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietar y trade- marks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. Pandora P andora is a registered trademark of P andora Media, Inc. <QRB3126-A/N>102 En 102 Appendix Additional Information
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Dzongkha (dz), 0426 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kinyarwanda (r w), 1823 English (en), 0514 Ewe (ee), 0505 Komi (kv), 1122 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 F rench (fr), 0618 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Cornish (kw), 1123 Sardinian (sc), 1903 Spanish (es), 0519 Estonian (et), 0520 Kirghiz, Kyrgyz (ky), 1125 Sindhi (sd), 1904 German (de), 0405 Basque (eu), 0521 Latin (la), 1201 Northern Sami (se), 1905 Italian (it), 0920 P ersian (fa), 0601 Luxembourgish (lb), 1202 Sangho (sg), 1907 Chinese (zh), 2608 Fulah (ff), 0606 Ganda (lg), 1207 Sinhala (si), 1909 Dutch, Flemish (nl), 1412 Finnish (fi), 0609 Limburgan (li), 1209 Slovak (sk), 1911 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Fijian (fj), 0610 Lingala (ln), 1214 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Swedish (sv), 1922 Faroese (fo), 0615 Lao (lo), 1215 Samoan (sm), 1913 Russian (ru), 1821 W estern Frisian (fy), 0625 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Shona (sn), 1914 Korean (ko), 1115 Irish (ga), 0701 Luba-Katanga (lu), 1221 Somali (so), 1915 Greek (el), 0512 Gaelic (gd), 0704 Latvian (lv), 1222 Albanian (sq), 1917 Afar (aa), 0101 Galician (gl), 0712 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Serbian (sr), 1918 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Guarani (gn), 0714 Marshallese (mh), 1308 Swati (ss), 1919 Avestan (ae), 0105 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Maori (mi), 1309 Sotho, Southern (st), 1920 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Manx (gv), 0722 Macedo nian (mk), 1311 Sundanese (su), 1921 Akan (ak), 0111 Hausa (ha), 0801 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Swahili (sw), 1923 Amharic (am), 0113 Hebrew (he), 0805 Mongolian (mn), 1 314 T amil (ta), 2001 Aragonese (an) , 0114 Hin di (hi), 0809 Marathi (mr), 1318 T elugu (te) , 2005 Arabic (ar), 0118 Hiri Motu (ho ), 0815 Malay (ms), 1319 T ajik (tg), 2007 Assamese (as), 0119 Croatian (hr), 0818 Maltese (mt), 1320 Thai (th) , 2008 Avaric (av), 0122 Haitian (ht), 0820 Burmese (my), 1325 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Aymara (ay), 0125 Hungar ian (hu), 0821 Nauru (na), 1401 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Armenian (hy), 0825 Bokmal (nb), 1402 T agalog (tl), 2012 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Herero (hz), 0826 Ndebele, North (nd), 1404 T swana (tn), 2014 Belarusian (be), 0205 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Nepali (ne), 1405 T onga (to), 2015 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Indone sian (id), 0904 Ndonga (ng), 1407 T urkish (tr), 2018 Bihari (bh), 0208 Interli ngue (ie), 0905 Nynorsk (nn), 1414 T songa (ts), 2019 Bislama (bi), 0209 Igbo (ig), 0907 Norwegian (no), 1415 T atar (tt), 2020 Bambara (bm), 0213 Sichuan Yi (ii), 0909 Ndebele, South (nr), 1418 T wi (tw), 2023 Bengali (bn), 0214 Inupiaq (ik), 0911 Navajo, Navaho (nv), 1422 T ahitian (ty), 2025 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Ido (io), 0915 Chichewa (ny), 1425 Uighur , Uyghur (ug), 2107 Breton (br), 0218 Icelandic (is), 0919 Occitan (oc), 1503 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Bosnian (bs), 0219 Inuktitut (iu), 0921 Ojibw a (oj), 1510 Urdu (ur), 2118 Catalan (ca), 0301 Javanese (jv), 1022 Oromo (om), 1513 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Chechen (ce), 0305 Geor gian (ka), 1101 Oriya (or), 1518 Venda (ve), 2205 Chamorro (c h), 0308 Kongo (kg), 1107 Ossetian (os), 1519 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Corsican (co), 0315 Kiku yu, Gikuyu (ki), 1109 P anjabi, Punjabi (pa), 1601 V olapük (vo), 2215 Cree (cr), 0318 Kuanyama (kj), 1110 Pali (pi), 1609 Walloon (wa), 2301 Czech (cs), 0319 Kazakh (kk), 1111 P olish (pl), 1612 W olof (wo), 2315 Church Slavic (cu), 0321 Kalaallisut (kl), 1112 Pashto, P ushto (ps), 1619 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Chuvash (cv), 0322 Central Khmer (km), 1113 Quechua (qu), 1721 Yiddish (yi), 2509 W elsh (cy), 0325 Kanna da (kn), 1114 Romansh (rm), 1813 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Danish (da), 0401 Kanuri (kr), 1118 Rundi (rn), 1814 Zhuang, Chuan g (za), 2601 Divehi (dv), 0422 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Romanian (ro), 1815 Zulu (zu), 2621 <QRB3126-A/N>103 En 103 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Specifications General P ower source ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ................... Negative type Maximum current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): D Chassis ..................... 178 mm à100 mm à165 mm (7 in. à3-7/8 in. à6-1/2 in.) Nose ........................... 171 mm à97 mm à18 mm (6-3/4 in.à3-7/8 in.à3/4 in.) (AVH-P4300DVD) Nose ........................... 171 mm à97 mm à7 mm (6-3/4 in. à3-7/8 in. à1/4 in.) (AVH-P3300BT) W eight .......................................... 2.2 kg (4.84 lbs) (AVH-P4300DVD) W eight .......................................... 1.8 kg (4.0 lbs) (AVH-P3300BT) Display Screen size/asp ect ratio ....... 6.95 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 156.4 à81.7 mm) (AVH-P4300DVD) Screen size/asp ect ratio ....... 5.8 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 128.4 à70.9 mm) (AVH-P3300BT) Pixels ............................................. 345 600 (1 440 à240) Display method ........................ TFT active matrix, driving type Color system .............................. NTSC Durable temperature range (power off) ..................................................... â 20 ðC to 80 ðC Audio Maximum power output ....... 50 W à4 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoo- fer) Continuous powe r output ... 22 W à4 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5 % THD, 4 W load, both channe ls dri- ven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W (2 W for 1 ch) allowable) Preout maximum output level ..................................................... 4.0 V Equalizer (8-Band Graphic Equalizer): F requency .......................... 40/80/200 /400/1k/2.5k/8k/ 10 kHz Gain ...................................... ñ12 dB HPF : F requency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/ 125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): F requency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/ 125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ18 dB/oct Gain ...................................... 6 dB to âÂÂ24 dB Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse Bass boost: Gain ...................................... 12 dB to 0 dB DVD Player System .......................................... DVD video, Video CD, CD, WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX , JPEG system Usable discs .............................. DVD video, Video CD, CD, CD-R/RW , DVD-R/RW/R DL Region number ........................ 1 F requency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net- work) (RCA level) Output level: Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver . 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT un es en- coded only) (.m4a) (V er . 8.2 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2, 6 (.avi, .div x) USB USB standard specification ..................................................... USB 1.1, USB 2.0 full speed Maximum current supply .... 500 mA USB Class ................................... MSC (Mass Storage Class) File system .................................. FA T16, FA T32 MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver . 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) <QRB3126-A/N>104 En 104 Appendix Additional Information
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT un es en- coded only) (V er . 8.2 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2, 6 (.avi, .div x) SD Compatible physical format ..................................................... Version 1.10 File system .................................. FA T12, FA T16, FA T32 MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver . 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT un es en- coded only) (V er . 8.2 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2, 6 (.avi, .div x) FM tuner F requency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IHF-A networ k) AM tuner F requency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 õV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IHF-A networ k) Bluetooth (AVH-P3300BT) V ersion .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0 certified Output power ............................ 4 dBm Max. (P ower class 2) CEA2006 Specifications P ower output ............................. 14 W RMS à4 Ch annels (4 W and ⦠1 % THD N) S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 W) Note Specifications and the design are subject to mod- ifications without notice. <QRB3126-A/N>105 En 105 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
<QRB3126-A/N>106 En 106
<QRB3126-A/N>107 En 107
<QRB3126-A/N>108
<QRB3126-A/N>109
<QRB3126-A/N>110
<QRB3126-A/N>111
PIONEER CORPORA TION 1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagaw a 212-0031, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 5 Arco Lane, Heather ton, Victoria, 3202 Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allsta te Parkway , Markham, Ontar io L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 TEL: 905-479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ å°å 帠堧 æ¹Âå ç 堠路 407 èÂÂ8 樠é» 話 ï¼ (02) 2657-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 ï¼ (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright ã 2010 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Thailand <QRB3126-A/N> UC <K OMZX> <10J00000> <QRB3126-A/N>112
Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product. T o ensure proper use, please read through this manual before using this product. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAUTION si n this manual. Please k eep the manual in a safe and acce ssible place for future r efer- ence. Be sure to read this ! DVD video disc r egion numbers 8 ! Handling guidelines 95 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 5 T o ensure safe driving 5 T o avoid battery exhaustion 6 Before you start Information to User 7 For Canadian model 7 The Safety of Y our Ears is in Y our Hands 7 About this unit 7 About this manual 8 Operating environment 8 After-sales ser vice for P ioneer products 8 Visit our website 9 Resetting the microprocessor 9 Demo mode 10 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 10 Use and care of the remote control 10 What âÂÂs what Head unit 11 Remote control 12 Basic operations Basic operations 13 Operating the scroll bar and the scrubber bar 14 Activating the touch panel keys 14 Common operations for menu settings/ lists 15 Adjusting the LCD panel angle 15 Ejecting a disc 15 Ejecting a disc 15 Ejecting an SD 15 Ejecting an SD 16 Setting the clock 16 T uner Introduction of tuner operations 17 Playing moving images Introduction of video playback operations 18 Playing audio Introduction of sound playback operations 21 Using Pandora â Introduction of P andora operations 23 Playing still images Introduction of still image playback operations 25 Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations 26 Bluetooth T elephone Introduction of Bluetooth telephone operations 27 XM/SIRIUS tuner Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner operations 29 HD Radio ä tuner Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner operations 31 Using Bluetooth wireless technology Introduction of Bluetooth telephone operations 32 Bluetooth audio operations 33 <QRB3126-A/N>2 Contents En 2
Detailed instructions Storing and recalling stations 35 Storing the strongest stations 35 T uning in to strong signals 35 T uning in to strong HD Radio signals 35 Using iT unes tagging 36 Switching the media file type 37 Operating the DVD menu 37 Operating this unit âÂÂs iPod function from your iP od 37 Random play (shuffle) 38 Playing all songs in random order (shuffle all) 38 Repeating playback 38 Playing videos from your iP od 38 Browsing for a video/music on the iPod 39 Resume playback (Bookmark) 39 F rame-by-frame playback 39 Slow motion playback 40 Searching for the part you want to play 40 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 40 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 40 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 41 Return to the specified scene 41 Selecting audio output 41 PBC playback 41 Selecting tracks from the track title list 41 Selecting files from the file name list 41 Using advanced sound retriever 42 Changing audiobook speed 42 Displaying lists related to the currently playing song (Link Search) 42 Playing DivX â VOD content 42 Capture an image in JPEG files 43 Changing the wide screen mode 43 Selecting and playing the Quick Mix/station list 44 Storing song information (bookmarks) 44 Switching the XM/SIRIUS channel selection mode 44 Selecting an XM/SIRIUS channel directly 45 Using the MyMix function 45 Using the Game Alert function 47 Displaying the Radio ID 48 Switching the SIRIUS display 48 Using the Instant Replay function 48 Switching the seek mode 49 Switching the reception mode 49 Calling a number in the phone book 49 Selecting a number by alphabet search mode 49 Using the missed, received and dialed call lists 50 Using the missed, received and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adapter 50 Setting automatic answering 50 Adjusting the other party âÂÂs listening volume 51 Switching the ring tone 51 Using the preset dial lists 51 Making a call by entering phone number 51 Setting the private mode 52 P airing from this unit 52 Using a Bluetooth device to pair 52 Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically 53 Switching visible unit 53 Displaying Bluetooth Device address 53 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 54 Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 54 Registering a connected cellular phone 54 V oice recognition 55 <QRB3126-A/N>3 En 3 Contents
Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 55 Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically 55 Displaying Bluetooth Device address 55 Menu operations Introduction of menu operations 56 Audio Adjustments 57 Setting up the DVD player 60 System settings 64 Entertainment settings 69 Customizing menus 70 Other Functions Changing the picture adjustment 71 Setting rear monitor output 71 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 72 Using an AUX source 72 Using an external unit 73 Installation Connecting the units 74 Installation 83 Additional Information T roubleshooting 86 Error messages 88 Understanding auto EQ error messages 92 Understanding messages 92 Indicator list 93 Handling guidelines 95 Compressed audio compatibility (disc, USB, SD) 97 iP od compatibility 98 Sequence of audio files 99 Using the display correctly 99 Copyright and trademark 100 Language code chart for DVD 103 Specifications 104 <QRB3126-A/N>4 Contents En 4
IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWITCH . IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, no viewing of front seat video should ever occur while the vehicle is being driven. ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply, they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. When you attempt to watch a video image while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the front display. T o watch a video image on the front display, park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. <QRB3126-A/N>5 En 5 Section 01 Precautions Precautions
Parking brake interlock Certain functions (Video viewing and certain touch panel keys) offered by this unit could be dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv- ing. T o prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set. If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving, they will be- come disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and (1) apply the parking brake, (2) release the parking brake, and then (3) apply the parking brake again. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake. When using a display connected to V OUT This unit âÂÂs V OUT is for connection of a dis- play to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or Video CD. WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location where the driver can watch a DVD while driving. When using the rear v iew camera With an optional rear view camera, this unit can be used as an aid to keep an eye on trai- lers, or when backing into a tight parking spot. WARNING ! SCREEN IMAGE MA Y APPEAR RE- VERSED. ! USE INPUT ONL Y FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MA Y RESUL T IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur- poses. ! Please note that the edges of the rear view camera images may differ slightly according to whether full screen images are displayed when backing up, and whether the images are used for checking the rear when the vehicle is moving forward. T o avoid battery exhaustion Keep the vehicle engine running when using this unit to avoid draining the battery power . ! When no power is supplied to this unit, such as when the vehicle batter y is being replaced, the microcomputer of this unit re- turns to its initial condition. W e recom- mend that you transcribe the audio adjustment data. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. <QRB3126-A/N>6 En 6 Section 01 Precautions
FCC ID: AJDK028 MODEL NO.: AVH-P3300BT IC: 775E-K028 This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio fre- quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple- ment C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has ver y low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive expo- sure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from per- son âÂÂs body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or op- erated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter . ! A VH-P4300DVD ! This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and (2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired oper- ation. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The Safety of Y our Ears is in Y our Hands Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level âÂÂa level that lets the sound come through clearly without annoying blar- ing or distortion and, most importantly , with- out affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing â comfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound, so what sounds âÂÂnormal â can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. EST ABLISH A SAFE LEVEL: ! Set your volume control at a low setting. ! Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , without dis- tortion. ! Once you have established a comfortable sound level, set the dial and leave it there. BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES: ! Do not turn up the volume so high that you can âÂÂt hear what âÂÂs around you. ! Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. ! Do not use headphones while operating a motorized vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo- cated for use in North America. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. <QRB3126-A/N>7 En 7 Section 02 Before you start Before you start
WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords asso- ciated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi- tion 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. CA UTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CA UTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over- heating could result from contact with liquids. ! Keep this manual handy for future reference. ! Always keep the volume low enough to hear outside sounds. ! Avoid exposure to moisture. ! If the battery is disconnected or discharged, any preset memor y will be erased. Important (Serial number) The serial number is located on the bottom of this unit. For your own security and convenience, be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card. DVD video disc region numbers Only DVD video discs with compatible region numbers can be played on this player . Y ou can find the region number of the player on the bottom of this unit and in this manual (refer to Specifications on page 104). About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions to ensure superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit â s potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. Operating environment This unit should be used within the tempera- ture ranges shown below . Operating temperature range: âÂÂ10 ðC to 60 ðC (14 ðF to 140 ðF) EN300328 ETC test temperature: âÂÂ20 ðC and 55 ðC ( âÂÂ4 ðF and 131 ðF) After -sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased this unit for after-sales ser vice (including warranty conditions) or any other informatio n. In case the necessar y infor- mation is not available, please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your unit to the companies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. <QRB3126-A/N>8 En 8 Section 02 Before you start
U.S.A. P ioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P .O . Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SA TISFACTION DEP ARTMENT 300 Allstate P arkway Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Lim- ited Warranty sheet included with this unit. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com in Canada http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca 1 Register your product. W e will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft. 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies. 3 Download owner âÂÂs manuals, order product catalogues, research new products, and much more. 4 Y our feedback is important in our continual ef- fort to design and build the most advanced, consumer-focused product in the industr y . Serial number Resetting the microprocessor By pressing RESET, you can reset the micro - processor to its initial settings without chan- ging the bookmark information. The microprocessor must be reset in the fol- lowing situations: ! Before using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. (AVH-P4300DVD) RESET button (AVH-P3300BT) RESET button Note Switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET in the follow- ing situations: ! After completing connections ! When erasing all stored settings ! When resetting the unit to its initial (factor y) settings <QRB3126-A/N>9 En 9 Section 02 Before you start Before you start
Demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select Off for the source and continues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold MUTE . Press and hold MUTE again to restart. Operating the feature demo while the car en- gine is turned off it may drain the batter y power . Important F ailure to connect the red lead (ACC) of this unit to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations may lead to battery drain. Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po - sitions of the touch panel. Refer to Adjusting the r esponse positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) on page 72. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray on the back of the remote con- trol out and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles aligned properly . ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING ! Keep the batter y out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, consult a doctor immediately . ! Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. CAUTION ! Use one CR2025 (3 V) lithium battery. ! Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! There is a danger of explosion if the batter y is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. ! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools. ! Do not store the battery with metallic objects. ! If the battery leaks, wipe the remote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, comply with governmental regulations or environmen- tal public institutions â rules that apply in your country/area. ! â P erchlorate Material â special handling may apply . See www .dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. (Applicable to California, U.S.A.) â Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! The remote control may not function properly in direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. <QRB3126-A/N>10 En 10 Section 02 Before you start
Head unit (AVH-P4300DVD) 3 a d (AVH-P3300BT) 2 3 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 9 b 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 a a a a c c c c c d d c c c d 1 Part Part 1 RESET 8 MODE T urning the infor- mation display off. 2 h (eject) 9 MENU Displaying the menu. Returning to the normal display. 3 Disc loading slot a SD memor y card slot Part Part 4 / â ( VOLUME/ VOL ) b USB port When connecting, open the USB con- nector lid. 5 c /d ( TRACK/ SEEK ) c AUX input jack (3.5 mm stereo/ video jack) Use to connect an auxiliar y device. 6 SRC/OFF d Auto EQ micro- phone input jack Use to connect an auto EQ micro- phone. 7 MUTE CAUTION ! (AVH-P3300BT) Use an optional Pioneer USB cable (CD-U50E) to connect the USB audio player/USB mem- ory as any device connected directly to the unit will protrude out from the unit and may be dangerous. ! Do not use unauthorized products. ! When inserting an SD card into the card slot, make sure that the label is facing the left and press the card until it clicks and completely locks into place. ! For details on how to operate a navigation unit from this unit, refer to its operation manual. Note When the navigation unit is connected, press MODE to switch to the navigation display. Press MODE and hold to turn the display off. P ress MODE again to turn the display on. <QRB3126-A/N>11 En 11 Section 03 What â s what What â s what
Remote control 4 5 6 7 e f g k h i l j Part Operation e Thumb pad Click to recall Menu. Use to select a menu on the DVD menu. f RETURN Press to display the PBC (playback con- trol) menu during PBC playback. g f Press to pause or re- sume playback. o Press to return to the previous track (chap- ter). p Press to go to the next track (chapter). g Press to stop play- back. h a /b ( FOLDER/P .CH ) Press to select the next/previous disc/ folder . Press to recall radio station frequenc ies as- signed to preset tun- ing keys. Part Operation i BAND/ESC Press to select the tuner band when tuner is selected as a source. Also used to cancel the control mode of functions. Press to switch be- tween modes when playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD - DA) such as CD - EXTRA and MIXED- MODE CDs. j MENU Press to display the DVD menu during DVD playback . TOP MENU Press to return to the top menu during DVD playback. k AUDIO Press to change the audio language during DVD playback . Press to switch audio output for Video CD/ DivX. SUBTITLE Press to change the subtitle language dur- ing DVD playback. ANGLE Press to change the viewing angle during DVD playback . l REAR SRC Press to cycle through all the available rear sources. Press and hold to turn the rear source off. <QRB3126-A/N>12 En 12 Section 03 What â s what
Basic operation s Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 1 2 Radio Disc iPod SD AUX SD Rear View Rear Front 3 5 4 6 ! T ouch panel keys 1 Displaying the source menu . 2 Wed 28 May 12:45 PM Switching to clock adjust- ment display. Refer to Setting the clock on page 16. 3 Radio Source icon Selecting a favorite sour ce. When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. 4 Rear Front Switching the output source for the rear monitor . Refer to Setting r ear monitor output on page 71. 5 Rear View Switching the rear view image on or off. 6 T urning the unit off . T urning the unit on using the buttons 1 Press SRC/OFF to turn the unit on. T urning the unit off using the buttons 1 Press SRC/OFF and hold un til the unit turns off. Selecting a source using the buttons 1 Press SRC/OFF to cycle through the sources listed below: Selecting a source using the touch panel keys 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. ! XM â XM tuner ! Sirius â SIRIUS tuner ! Radio /HD Radio â Radio/Digital Radio tuner ! AV â AV input ! Disc â Built-in DVD player ! USB/iPod â USB/iPod ! Pandora â Pandora ! SD â SD memor y card ! EXT1 â External unit 1 ! EXT2 â External unit 2 ! AUX â AUX ! TEL/Audio â Bluetooth telephone/audio (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. ! While operating the menu, you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. Adjusting the volume 1 Press / â ( VOLUME/VOL) to adjust the volume . Notes ! In this manual, iP od and iPhone will be re- ferred to as âÂÂiP od âÂÂ. ! The USB/iPod icon will change as follows: â USB is displayed when a USB storage de- vice is connected. â iPod is displayed when an iP od is con- nected. â USB/iPod is displayed when no device is connected. ! When appropriately set up, the image from the rear view camera can be displayed auto- matically . F or details, refer to Setting the rear view camera (back up camera) on page 66. ! An external unit refers to a Pioneer product, such as those which will be available in the fu- ture. Although incompatible as a source, the basic functions of up to two external units can be controlled with this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the external units are automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2. ! If the HD Radio tuner is connected to this unit, tuner source is skipped. <QRB3126-A/N>13 En 13 Section 04 Basic operations Basic operation s
Operating the scroll bar and the scrubber bar Audio Fader/Balance F/R 0 L/R 0 Super Bass On Graphic EQ Auto EQ High Off L/R 0 Sonic Center Control Loudness Subwoofer 1 1 2 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01 01 81 2 01:45 -02:45 01 L R 2 1 Scroll icon Appears when selectable items are hidden. 2 Scrubber bar Appears when the playback point can be spe- cified or set by dragging. Viewing the hidden items 1 T ouch the scroll icon or drag the scrubber bar to view any hidden items. Specifying the playback point 1 Drag the scrubber bar on the screen. (Not available when the scrubber bar is grayed out.) Activating the touch panel keys Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01 01 81 2 01:45 -02:45 01 L R 1 1 1 12 2 2 2 Return 3 1 T ouch panel keys P erform various operations by touching the panel. 2 Open/close keys Control the touch panel key area by touching these keys. 1 T urning the display to simpli- fied display. Returning to the normal dis- play by touching the screen when playing moving images. Returning to the normal dis- play by touching same icon when playing audio. 2 Viewing the hidden touch panel keys. 3 Shorten the touch panel area. <QRB3126-A/N>14 En 14 Section 04 Basic operation s
Common operati ons for menu settings/lists (AVH-P3300BT only) Starting the Bluetooth telephone menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth tel- ephone operations on page 27. Displaying the list menu . Starting the search function. Displaying the menu. Refer to Introduction of menu opera- tions on page 56. Displaying still images as a slide show when listening to another source. Viewing slide shows. Refer to Introduction of still image playback opera tions on page 25. Returning to the previous display. Returning to the previous list/cate- gor y (the folder/categor y one level higher .) ! Press and hold MENU to display Picture Adjustment . Refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 71. Adjusting the LCD panel angle (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. 1 Press h(eject) to display the ejecting menu. 2 Adjust the LCD panel to an easily view- able angle. Laying the panel down. Returning the panel to the upright position. # As the set angle is saved, the LCD panel will automatically be adjusted to the same position the next time the LCD panel is opened. Ejecting a disc (AVH-P4300DVD) 1 Press h(eject) to display the ejecting menu. 2 Eject a disc. Ejecting a disc. Ejecting a disc (AVH-P3300BT) % Press h (eject). Ejecting an SD (AVH-P4300DVD) 1 Press h(eject) to display the ejecting menu. 2 Eject an SD. Ejecting an SD. 3 Press an SD to eject. <QRB3126-A/N>15 En 15 Section 04 Basic operations Basic operation s
Ejecting an SD (AVH-P3300BT) % Press an SD to eject. Setting the clock 1 Switch to Clock Adjustment display . Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Select the item to set. 3 T ouch a or b to set the correct date and time. <QRB3126-A/N>16 En 16 Section 04 Basic operation s
Introduction of tuner operations Wed 28 May 12:45 PM P .ch 2 MHz Band: FM1 Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Local Radio 87.9 87.9 MHz Abcdeabcdeabcde 6 12 3 4 5 ! T ouch panel keys 1 T urning local seek tuning on and off. Refer to T uning in to strong signals on page 35. 2 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 3 Displaying the preset chan - nel list. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. Refer to Storing the strongest stations on page 35. 4 Band: Selecting a band (FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or AM). 5 Recalling radio station fre- quencies assigned to preset tuning keys. 6 TAG Saving song information (tag) from the broadcasti ng station to your iPod . Refer to Using iT unes tagging on page 36. Manual tuning (step by step) using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Seek tuning using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Note Listening AM radio while an iP od is charged from this unit may generate noise. In this case, discon- nect the iPod from this unit. <QRB3126-A/N>17 En 17 Section 05 T uner T uner
Introduction of video playback operations Y ou can view DVD/DVD -R/DVD -RW/CD/CD-R/ CD-RW/USB/SD/iPod . DVD video Return Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01 01 81 2 01:45 -02:45 01 L R Video CD R etu r n iPod video Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01:45 ALL Songs S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab 2067/12345 iPod When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types 01:45 -02:45 ! (AVH-P4300DVD) If an iPod with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit using an interface cable such as the CD-IU200V (sold separately), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od as an iPod source. ! (AVH-P3300BT) If an iPod with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit using an interface cable such as the CD-IU50V (sold separately), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od as an iPod source. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating playback on page 38. 2 During playback, touch the point at which you want to re- sume playback the next time the disc is loaded. Refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 39. 3 Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 43. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Switching betwee n audio languages during playback. Refer to Changing audio lan- guage during playback (Multi- audio) on page 40. 6 Switching betwee n subtitle languages during playback. Refer to Changing the subti- tle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) on page 40. 7 Switching among viewing angles during playback. Refer to Changing the view- ing angle during playback (Multi-angle) on page 41. <QRB3126-A/N>18 En 18 Section 06 Playing moving images
8 Switching the audio out put, when playing video discs re- corded with LPCM audio. Refer to Selecting audio out- put on page 41. Switching betwee n stereo and monaural audio output, when playing Video CD discs. 9 Starting the search function. Refer to Searching for the part you want to play on page 40. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 41. Displaying iPod menus. Refer to Playing videos from your iPod on page 38 and Browsing for a video/music on the iP od on page 39. a P ausing playback. Returning to normal play- back during paused, slow motion, or frame-by-fr ame playback. b Displaying the DVD menu during DVD playback. Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 37. c Returning to the top menu during DVD playback. d Stopping playback . Stopping playback at the point set in Resume play- back. T ouch one more time to stop playback completely when playing DivX. Refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 39. e Displaying arrow keys to op- erate the DVD menu. Refer to Using the arrow k eys on page 37. f Skipping to another title. Selecting a folder during DivX file playback. g Moving ahead one frame at a time during playback. Refer to F rame-by-frame play- back on page 39. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to slow down playback speed. Speeding up the playback speed in four steps during slow motion playback on DVD video/Video CD. h Speeding down the playback speed in four steps , during slow motion playback on Video CD. i Return Returning to the specified scene to which the DVD cur- rently being played has been preprogrammed to return. Refer to Return to the speci- fied scene on page 41. j Playing the video on your iP od in a random order . Refer to Random play (shuf- fle) on page 38. k Switching the Advanced sound retriever function set- ting when playing a video on your iPod . Refer to Using advanced sound re triever on page 42. l Conducting operation from your iPod and listening to it using your car âÂÂs speakers. Refer to Operating this unit âÂÂs iP od function from your iPod on page 37. m Switching betwee n media file types to play on DVD/CD/ USB/SD. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 37. <QRB3126-A/N>19 En 19 Section 06 Playing moving images Playing moving images
Playing back videos 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with the label side up. Playback will automatically start. ! If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu may appear . Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 37 and PBC playback on page 41. ! When the automatic playback function is on, the unit will skip the DVD menu and automatically start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 63. ! While an iPod is connected to this unit, PIONEER, Accessory Attached or (check mark) is dis- played on the iPod . ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. ! Disconnect headphones from the iPod before connecting it to this unit. ! Depending on the iPod model and the amount of data stored in the iPod , it may take some time for playback to begin. ! Use the touch panel keys to select the iPod after connecting it to this unit. ! No Device is displayed when discon necting the iP od. ! If a message is displ ayed after loading a disc con- taining DivX VOD content, touch Play. Refer to Play ing DivX â VOD content on page 42. Ejecting a disc 1 Refer to Eject ing a disc on page 15 or Ejecting an SD on page 15. Selecting a chapter using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). F ast for warding or reversing using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). ! F ast forward/fa st rewind may not always be possi- ble on some discs. In such cases, normal play- back will automatically resu me. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re- corded on CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW . (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. Refer to page 97.) ! Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/- RW) or CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. ! If the bookmark function is on, DVD playback resumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 39. ! Some operations may not be available while watching a DVD due to the programming of the disc. In such cases, the icon appears on the screen. ! T o ensure proper operation, connect the dock connector cable from the iP od directly to this unit. ! While the iPod is connected to this unit, the iP od cannot be turned on or off . However , the iP od can be turned on or off when you select an SD as the source. <QRB3126-A/N>20 En 20 Section 06 Playing moving images
Introduction of sound playback operations Y ou can listen to DVD-R/DVD -RW/CD/CD-R/ CD-RW/USB/SD/iPod sound files. Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 125 01:45 ROM ALL Songs S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab 87 6 1 2 3 4 9 7 5 8 CD Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01:45 ALL Songs S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcdeab 2067/12345 iPod 6h c d e 1 a b 3 4 5 g f i iPod audio Y ou can control an iP od with this unit by using a cable such as the CD-IU50 (sold separately). ! T ouch panel keys 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play- back on page 38. 2 Playing songs in ran dom order . Refer to Random play (shuffle) on page 38. 3 Switching the Advanced sound retriever function setting when playing audio. Refer to Using advanced sound re triever on page 42. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equali- zer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto -equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Displaying a list of track titles/file names to select songs on a CD. Refer to Selecting tracks from the track title list on page 41. Displaying the file name list to select the files. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 41. Displaying iPod menus. Refer to Browsing for a video/music on the iPod on page 39. 6 P ausing and starting playback. 7 Switching the text infor- mation to display on this unit when playing MP3/ WMA/AAC files. 8 Selecting a folder . 9 Switching betwee n media file types on a DVD/CD/USB/SD. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 37. a Playing songs on the iP od in random order . Refer to Random play (shuffle) on page 38. b Changing the speed of audiobook playback on the iPod . Refer to Changing audio - book speed on page 42. <QRB3126-A/N>21 En 21 Section 07 Playing audio Playing audio
c Switching to Link Sear ch mode to play songs re- lated to the currently playing song on the iPod . Refer to Displaying lists related to the currently playing song (Link Search) on page 42. d Playing all songs on the iP od in random order . Refer to Playing all songs in random order (shuffle all) on page 38. e Conducting operation from your iPod and listen- ing to it using your car âÂÂs speakers. Refer to Operating this unit âÂÂs iPod function fr om your iPod on page 37. ! T ext information f Displaying the Songs list on the iPod . Refer to Searching for a video/music by categor y on page 39. g Displaying the Artists list on the iPod . Refer to Searching for a video/music by categor y on page 39. h Displaying the Albums list on the iPod . Refer to Searching for a video/music by categor y on page 39. ! Artwork display i Starting Album Link Search on yo ur iP od when you touch the artwork display. Refer to Displaying lists related to the cur- rently play ing song (Link Search) on page 42. Playing back sound 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with the label side up. Playback will automatically start. ! While an iPod is connected to this unit, PIONEER, Accessory Attached or (check mark) is dis- played on the iPod . ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. ! Disconnect headphones from the iPod before connecting it to this unit. ! Depending on the iPod model and the amount of data stored in the iPod , it may take some time for playback to begin. ! Use the touch panel keys to select the iPod after connecting it to this unit. ! No Device is displayed when discon necting the iP od. Ejecting a disc 1 Refer to Eject ing a disc on page 15 or Ejecting an SD on page 15. Selecting a track using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). F ast for warding or reversing using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Notes ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! T o ensure proper operation, connect the dock connector cable from the iP od directly to this unit. ! While the iPod is connected to this unit, the iP od cannot be turned on or off . However , the iP od can be turned on or off when you select an SD as the source. ! If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. ! T ext information may not be correctly dis- played depending on the recorded environ- ment. ! Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memor y when you are done using it. ! When you select Clock or Speana on Select- ing the background display on page 69, the art- work is not displayed. <QRB3126-A/N>22 En 22 Section 07 Playing audio
Introduction of Pandora operations Y ou can play the P andora by connecting your iP od which was installed the Pandora applica- tion. Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde Wed 28 May 12:45 PM 01:45 Pandora S.Rtrv -02:45 Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcdeabcde 6 12 3 4 7 5 8 Important Requirements to access the P andora music ser- vice using the P ioneer car audio/video products: ! Apple iPhone (first generation), iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS or iPhone 4 with firmware version 3.0 or later . ! Latest version of the P andora application for the iPhone, downloaded to your device. (Search Apple iT unes App Store for â P andora âÂÂ). ! Current P andora account (F ree account and paid accounts available from P andora; create a free account online at http://www .pandora.com/register or through the P andora application for the iPhone). ! iPhone Data Plan. Note: if the Data Plan for your iPhone does not provide for unlimited data usage, addi- tional charges from A T&T may apply for acces- sing the Pandora ser vice via A T&T âÂÂs 3G and/or EDGE networks. ! Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE or WiFi network. ! Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting your iPhone to the P ioneer car audio/video products. Limitations: ! Access to the P andora ser vice will depend on the availability of a cellular and/or WiFi net- work for purposes of allowing your iPhone to connect to the Internet. ! P andora âÂÂs ser vice is currently only available in the U.S. ! Ability of the P ioneer car audio/video products to access the P andora ser vice is subject to change without notice and could be affected by any of the following: compatibility issues with future firmware versions of iPhones; compatibility issues with future firmware ver- sions of the P andora application for the iPhone; changes to the Pandora music ser vice by P andora; discontinuation of the P andora music ser vice by P andora. ! Certain functionality of the P andora service is not available when accessing the ser vice through the Pioneer car audio/video products, including, but not limited to, creating new sta- tions, deleting stations, emailing current sta- tions, buying songs from iT unes, viewing additional text information, logging in to P andora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality . P andora Internet radio is a music service not af- filiated with Pioneer . More information is avail- able at http://www .pandora.com. Y ou can play the P andora by connecting your iP od which was installed the Pandora applica- tion. ! T ouch panel keys <QRB3126-A/N>23 En 23 Section 08 Using Pandora â Using Pandora â
1 Switching the advanced sound retriever function setting while playing P andora. Refer to Using advanced sound re triever on page 42. 2 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equali- zer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto -equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 3 Displaying the QuickMix/ station list to select QuickMix or the desired station. Refer to Selecting and playing the Quick Mix/sta- tion list on page 44. 4 P ausing and starting playback. 5 Storing song information (Bookmark). Refer to Storing song in- formation (bookmarks) on page 44. 6 Giving a âÂÂThumbs Down â for the song curr ently playing and then skip- ping to the next song. 7 Giving a âÂÂThumbs Up â for the song currently play- ing. ! T ext information 8 Playing the station list. Playing songs 1 Open the USB connect or cover . 2 Connect an iPod to the USB cable usi ng an iPod Dock Connector . 3 Start up the Pandora application installed on the iP od. Skipping tracks 1 Press d. <QRB3126-A/N>24 En 24 Section 08 Using Pandora â
Introduction of still image playback operations Y ou can view still images saved in CD -R/CD- RW/USB/SD. CD Capture Photo Wed 28 May 12:45 PM Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Full Off 2 2 5 1 2 34 7 6 8 When playing a disc containing a mixt ure of various media file types 01:45 -02:45 When loading a CD-R/CD -RW/USB/SD con- taining JPEG picture files, this unit starts a sli- deshow from the first folder/picture on the disc/device. The player displays the pictures in each folder on the CD-R/CD -RW in alphabeti- cal order by file name. The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow. ! T ouch panel keys T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating playback on page 38. 2 Playing files in a random order . Refer to Random play (shuf- fle) on page 38. 3 Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 43. 4 Displaying the file name list to select the files. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 41. 5 Starting or pausing the sli- deshow . 6 Rotating the displayed pic- ture 90ð clockwise. 7 Capturing an image in JPEG files. Refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 43. 8 Selecting a folder . 9 Switching betwee n media file types. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 37. Playing still images 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with the label side up. Playback will automatically start. ! When the source icon is not displayed, it can be displayed by touching the screen. Ejecting a disc. 1 Refer to Eject ing a disc on page 15 or Ejecting an SD on page 15. Selecting a file using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). F ast file searching 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). ! Y ou ca n search 10 JPEG files at a time. Notes ! This unit can play back a JPEG file recorded on CD-R/CD-RW/SD/USB storage device. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. Refer to page 97.) <QRB3126-A/N>25 En 25 Section 09 Playing still images Playing still images
! Files are played back in file number order and folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations Y ou can view still images saved in CD -R/CD- RW/USB/SD as a slideshow when listening to another source. Capture Full Off 8 2 1 6 3 7 45 The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow. ! T ouch panel keys T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. 1 Selecting the repeat range. Refer to Repeating playback on page 38. 2 Playing files in a random order . Refer to Random play (shuf- fle) on page 38. 3 Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 43. 4 Selecting a folder . 5 Selecting a file. 6 Starting or pausing the sli- deshow . 7 Rotating the displayed pic- ture 90ð clockwise 8 Capturing an image in JPEG files. Refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 43. 1 Start slideshow when listening to an- other source. Refer to Common operations for menu set- tings/lists on page 15. Displaying still images as a slide show . 2 Select the device containing the files that you want to display . ! Disc â Built-in DVD player ! USB â USB ! SD â SD memory card # T o cancel searching, touch Cancel. Note When the USB or SD source is selected, this unit cannot view still images on USB/SD as a slideshow . <QRB3126-A/N>26 En 26 Section 09 Playing still images
Introduction of Bluetooth telephone oper ations T elephone standby display Wed 28 May 1 12:45 PM 87.9 MHz P .CH 2 Band: FM1 Radio ABCDEHGHI 012345678901 01 Off On Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde 1 45 7 2 2 16 3 When switching to the entering phone number mode Wed 28 may 1 12:45 PM ABCDEHGHI 012345678901 01 123 456 789 * 0 # C Off 8 b a9 2 Y ou can use Bluetooth telephone (A VH-P3300BT only). Important ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology , using it without the engine run- ning can drain the battery power . ! Advanced operations that require attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , etc., are prohibited while driving. P ark your vehicle in a safe place when using these advanced operations. ! Operations available may be limited depend- ing on the cellular phone connected to this unit. ! Be sure to park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake when per forming this operation. 1 Incoming call notice Indicates that an incoming call has been re- ceived and has not been checked yet. ! Not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. 2 T ouch panel keys 1 Switching the mode to enter the phone number directly . Refer to Making a call by en- tering phone number on page 51. 2 Switching to the call histor y list. Refer to Using the missed, r e- ceived and dialed call lists on page 50. 3 Switching to the phone book mode. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on page 49. Refer to Selecting a number by alphabet search mode on page 49. 4 T urning automa tic answering on or off . Refer to Setting automatic an- swering on page 50. 5 T urning the ring tone for in- coming calls on or off. Refer to Switching the ring tone on page 51. 6 Displaying the preset dial screen. Refer to Using the preset dial lists on page 51. 7 Displaying the Bluetooth connection menu. Refer to the instructions from page 52 to page 54. 8 T urning private mode on or off . Refer to Setting the private mode on page 52. 9 Adjusting the other party âÂÂs listening volume . Refer to Adjusting the other party âÂÂs listening volume on page 51. <QRB3126-A/N>27 En 27 Section 10 Bluetooth T elephone Bluetooth T elephone
a Accepting an incoming call. Making a phone call, when selecting a phone number . Switching betwee n callers on hold. b Ending a call. Rejecting an incoming call. Canceling call waiting. Notes ! P rivate mode can only be operated while you are talking on the phone. ! T o end the call, both you and the other caller must hang up your phones. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection First, you ne ed to connect a Bluetooth telephone to this unit. For detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , see followi ng section. Using a Bluetooth de- vice to pair on page 52 and P airing from this unit on page 52. ! Y ou may also ne ed to enter a PIN code into this unit. If your telephone requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the telephone or in its accompan ying documentation. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wir eless connection on page 54. 2 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume of your cell ular phone to your preference. The unit will record the ad- justed volume level as the default setting. ! The volume of the caller âÂÂs voice and ring tone may var y depending on the type of cellular phone. ! If there is a large volume difference between the ring tone and caller âÂÂs voice , the overall vo- lume level may become unstable. ! Make sure to adjust the volume to a proper level before disconnecting the cellular phone from the unit. If the volume is muted (ze ro level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. <QRB3126-A/N>28 En 28 Section 10 Bluetooth T elephone
Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner operations SIRIUS tuner Wed 28 may 12:45 PM CH183 P .CH 2 Band: SIRIUS Abcdeabcdeabcde SIRIUS CH183 Memo Off Mode All CH T eam Off 6 5 4 12 3 7 Memo Edit T eam Setting Instant Replay Game Info Memo 9 a b c d 8 XM tuner Abcdeabcdeabcde Wed 28 may 12:45 PM CH183 P .ch 2 Band: XM Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde Abcdeabcdeabcde CH183 Mode All CH XM XM 6 5 4 1 Memo Edit Memo 8a b Y ou can use this unit to control an XM satellite digital tuner (GEX-P920XM), which is sold se- parately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on XM operations with this unit which differs from that described in the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manual. Y ou can use this unit to control a SIRIUS Satel- lite Radio tuner , which is sold separately . When the SIRIUS tuner is used together with this unit, some operations differ slightly from those described in the SIRIUS operation man- ual. This manual provides information on these points. For all other information on using the SIRIUS tuner , please refer to the SIR- IUS operation manual. ! With this unit, you can operate one addi- tional function: XM/SIRIUS channel direct selection. Refer to Selecting an XM/SIRIUS channel directly on page 45. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Mode All CH Mode Category Selecting a channel by num- ber or categor y . Refer to Switching the XM/ SIRIUS channel selection mode on page 44. 2 Memo On Memo Off T uning the MyMix funct ion on or off for the SIRI US tuner . Refer to T urning the MyMix function on or off on page 46. 3 Te a m On Te a m Off T urning the Game Ale rt on or off for the SIRIUS tuner . Refer to Switching the Game Alert on or off on page 47. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Displaying the preset chan - nel list. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. Selecting a channel directly. Refer to Selecting an XM/SIR- IUS channel directly on page 45. Selecting a channel from the XM channe l list. Refer to Selecting a channel from the XM channel list dis- play on page 44. <QRB3126-A/N>29 En 29 Section 11 XM/SIRIUS tuner XM/SIRIUS tune r
6 Band: Selecting a band ( XM1 , XM2 or XM3) for XM tuner . Selecting a band ( SIRI US1, SIRIUS2 or SIRIUS3 ) for the SIRIUS tuner . 8 Recalling radio station fre- quencies assigned to preset tuning keys. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. Selecting the channel cate- gor y when selecting Mode Category . Refer to Switching the XM/ SIRIUS channel selection mode on page 44 and Sele ct- ing a SIRIUS channe l from a channel categor y on page 44. 9 Instant Replay Selecting a track, fast for- warding/reversing or paus- ing/playing for the SIRIU S tuner . Refer to Using the Instant Re- play function on page 48. a Memo Storing the song title and ar- tist name. Refer to Making the MyMix playlist on page 45. b Memo Edit Switching to memo edit mode. Refer to Setting up a song alert on page 46. Refer to Deleting a song fro m the MyMix playlist for XM tuner on page 46. Refer to Deleting a song fro m the MyMix playlist for SIRIUS tuner on page 47. c Game Info Displaying information on games for the SIRIUS tuner . Refer to Displaying game in- formation on page 48. d Te a m Setting Selecting teams for game alert on the SIRIU S tuner . Refer to Selecting teams for Game Alert on page 47. ! SIRIUS tuner information 7 Switching the SIRIUS information. Refer to Switching the SIRIUS displ ay on page 48. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to scroll the text. Manual tuning (step by step) using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Seek tuning using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Note Y ou can also perform tuning from a desired chan- nel categor y . (Refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel from a channel categor y on page 44.) <QRB3126-A/N>30 En 30 Section 11 XM/SIRIUS tune r
Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner operations Abcdeabcdeabcde Wed 28 may 12:45 PM 87.9 MHz P .CH 2 Band: FM1 TA G Digital Radio Local 87.9 MHz Seek All Blending D/A Auto 67 8 9 1 4 2 35 This HD Radio Ready receiver is ready to re- ceive HD Radio broadcasts when connected to the HD Radio tuner (e.g. GEX-P20HD), sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the HD Radio tuner âÂÂs operation manual. ! T ouch panel keys 1 T urning local seek tuning on or off. Refer to T uning in to strong HD Radio signals on page 35. 2 Seek All Seek HD Switching betwee n Digital broadcasting sta tion seek and normal seek. Refer to Switching the seek mode on page 49. 3 Blending D/A Auto Blending Analog Switching to the analog broadcast of the same fre- quency . Refer to Switching the recep- tion mode on page 49. 4 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 5 Displaying the preset chan - nel list. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. 6 Band: Selecting a band (FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or AM). 8 Recalling radio station fre- quencies assigned to preset tuning keys. Refer to Storing and recalling stations on page 35. 9 TAG Saving song information (tag) from the broadcasti ng station to your iPod . ! Digital Radio tuner information 7 Switching the digital radio tuner informa- tion. Manual tuning (step by step) using the buttons 1 Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). Seek tuning using the buttons 1 Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). <QRB3126-A/N>31 En 31 Section 12 HD Radio ä tuner HD Radio ä tuner
Introduction of Bluetooth telephone oper ations During a call Abcdeabc Wed 28 May 12:45 PM REG T ext Scroll TEL 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 Except during a call REG T ext Scroll a When you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200 )(sold separately) to AVH- P4300DVD, you can control Bluetooth tele- phone. But the available features are limited. Important ! In some countries, CD- BTB200 is not sold on the market. ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology , using it without the engine run- ning can drain the battery power . ! Advanced operations that require attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , etc., are prohibited while driving. P ark your vehicle in a safe place when using these advanced operations. ! Operations available may be limited depend- ing on the cellular phone connected to this unit. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto- equalizer on page 58. 2 Accepting an incoming call. Making a phone call, when selecting a phone number from the dialed and received call histor y . 3 Ending a call. Rejecting an incoming call. Canceling call waiting. 4 Displaying the received/ missed call histor y . Selecting a phone number from the call histor y. Refer to Using the missed, r e- ceived and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adap- ter on page 50. 5 Displaying the dialed call his- tory. Selecting a phone number from the call histor y. Refer to Using the missed, r e- ceived and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adap- ter on page 50. 6 Text Scroll Scrolling the phone number . T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to activate connection mode on this unit and establish a Blue- tooth wireless connection from your phone. Refer to Using a cellu lar phone to initiate a connection on page 54. <QRB3126-A/N>32 En 32 Section 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology
7 Registering connected cellu- lar phone to take full ad van- tage of the features available with Bluetooth wireless tech- nology. Refer to Registering a con- nected cellular phone on page 54. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to termi- nate the Bluetooth wireless connection. 8 T urning automa tic answering on or off . Refer to Setting automatic an- swering on page 50. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to connect to a Bluetooth telephone automatically. Refer to Connecting to a Blue- tooth device automatically on page 55. 9 T urning the ring tone for in- coming calls on or off. Refer to Switching the ring tone on page 51. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to display the Bluetooth device address of your cellular phone and the Bluetooth adapter . Refer to Displaying Bluetoo th Device addr ess on page 55. a Switching between Bluetooth telephone and Bluetooth audio. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to start voice recognition. Refer to V oice recogni tion on page 55. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection First, you ne ed to connect a Bluetooth telephone to this unit. For detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , see followi ng section. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connect ion on page 54 and Registering a connected cellular phone on page 54. 2 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume of your cell ular phone to your preference. The unit will record the ad- justed volume level as the default setting. ! The volume of the caller âÂÂs voice and ring tone may var y depending on the type of cellular phone. ! If there is a large volume difference between the ring tone and caller âÂÂs voice , the overall vo- lume level may become unstable. ! Make sure to adjust the volume to a proper level before disconnecting the cellular phone from the unit. If the volume is muted (ze ro level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. Bluetooth au dio operations When you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200)(sold separately) to A VH- P4300DVD, you can control Bluetooth audio. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the available operations will be limited to the following two levels: â A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution P rofile): Y ou can only playback songs on your audio player . â AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Con- trol Profile): Y ou can per form playback, pause playback, select songs, etc. ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, available op- erations will var y extensively . When operating your player with this unit, refer to the instruc- tion manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual. <QRB3126-A/N>33 En 33 Section 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology Using Bluetooth wireless technology
! Information related to a song (such as the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) cannot be displayed on this unit. ! As the signal from your cellular phone may cause noise, avoid using it when you are lis- tening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player . ! When a call is in progress on the cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , the sound of the Blue- tooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! When the Bluetooth audio player is in use, you cannot connect to a Bluetooth telephone automatically . ! Playback continues even if you switch from your Bluetooth audio player to another source while listening to a song. ! T ouch panel keys Switching betwee n Bluetooth tele- phone and Bluetooth audio. Skipping back or for ward to an- other track when Auto is set for the auto/manual setting. Performing fast for ward or rewind when Manual is set for the auto/ manual setting. F1 P ausing a song. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to activate connection mode on this unit and establish a Bluetooth wirele ss connection from your player . Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on page 55. F2 Playback starts. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to terminate the Blue- tooth wireless connection. Auto Setting the action for c and d icons. Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto-equalizer on page 58. Setting up for Bluetooth audio Before you can use the Bluetooth audio func- tion you must set up the unit for use with your Bluetooth audio player . This entails establish- ing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your Bluetooth audio player , and pairing your Bluetooth audio player with this unit. 1 Connection First, you ne ed to connect a Bluetooth audio to this unit. For detailed instructions on connecting your Bluetooth audio to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology, see Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on page 55. <QRB3126-A/N>34 En 34 Section 13 Using Bluetooth wireless technology
Storing and recalling stations Y ou can easily store up to six stations for each band as presets. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memor y . ! Channels are stored and recalled on a broadcast station basis. This means that if the broadcast station you stored has been assigned to a different channel by SIRIUS, you can still recall the same broadcast sta- tion (though a different channel number may appear in the display). 1 Display the preset screen. Refer to Introduction of tuner operations on page 17. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. The preset screen appears in the display. 2 T ouch and hold one of the preset tun- ing keys to store the selected frequency in the memory . The selected radio station frequency has been stored in the memor y . 3 T ouch one of the preset tuning keys to select the desired station. # Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys Preset1 to Preset6 when the Mode All CH mode is se- lected. (F unction of SIRIUS tuner) Storing the strongest stations BSM (best stations memor y) automatically stores the six strongest stations in the order of their signal strength. Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using the preset tuning keys. 1 Display the preset screen. Refer to Introduction of tuner operations on page 17. Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. The preset screen appears in the display. 2 T ouch BSM to turn BSM on. The six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys in order of their signal strength. # T o cancel the storage process, touch Cancel . T uning in to strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in to only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. FM: off â â â â AM: off â â The highest level setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower levels allow the reception of weaker stations. T uning in to strong HD Radio signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in to only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Start local seek tuning Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. 2 T ouch On on Local to turn on. # T o turn off , touch Off . 3 T ouch c or d on Level to select the de- sired level. # Level1 âÂÂLevel2 âÂÂLevel3 â Level4 <QRB3126-A/N>35 En 35 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
# The larger the setting number , the higher the signal level. The highest level setting allows re- ception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Using iT unes tagging This function can be operated with the following iP od models. â iPhone 4 â iPhone 3GS â iPhone 3G â iPhone â iP od nano 5th generation â iP od 5th generation â iP od nano 4th generation â iP od nano 3rd generation â iP od touch 2nd generation â iP od touch 1st generation â iP od classic 2nd generation â iP od classic However , tag information can be stored in this unit even while other iP od models are used. When you want to use this function in the HD Radio tuner sour ce, use an HD Radio tuner (GEX-P20HD). The song informatio n (tag) can be saved from the broadcasting station to your iP od . The songs will show up in a playlist called âÂÂT agged playlist â in iT unes the next time you sync your iP od. Then you can directly buy the songs you want from the iT unes Store. The tagged songs and the song that you can buy from the iT unes Store may be different. Make sure to confirm the song before you make the purchase. If you cannot use this function normally , up- date your iPod firmware. Storing the tag information to this unit 1 T une in to the broadcast station. 2 Store the tag information to this unit. Refer to Introduction of tuner operations on page 17. Refer to Introduction of HD Radio ä tuner opera- tions on page 31. Y ou can store the information if the TA G indi- cator is displayed while the desired song is being broadcast. # While storing the tag data on this unit, TA G flashes. # The tag information for up to 50 songs can be stored on this unit. Depending on the timing of when the tag infor- mation is stored, the tag information for the song played before or aft er the currently playing song may also be stored. # If an SD is selected as the source while tag in- formation is being stored to this unit, the tag in- formation will not be transferred to the iPod . 3 When completed, indicator turns off and indicator is displayed. Storing the tagged information to your iPod 1 Connect your iPod if it's not connected to this unit. When your iPod is connected to this unit, your iP od starts storing the tagged information automatically . # While transferring the tag, you cannot select the SD source. 2 When completed, indicator on page 93 tur ns off and the tagged information is stored on your iPod. # T ag information cannot be transferred to the iP od when a file on an SD device is being viewed as a slideshow . <QRB3126-A/N>36 En 36 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types, such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Audio data (CD -DA) and JPEG picture files on DVD-R/RW/ROM cannot be played back on this unit. CD (audio data (CD-DA)) âÂÂMusic/ROM (com- pressed audio) â Video (DivX video files) â Photo (JPEG picture files) Operating the DVD menu (F unction for DVD video) Some DVDs allow you to make a selection from the disc contents using a menu. Using the arrow keys 1 Display arrow keys to operate the DVD menu. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 Select the desired menu item. Selecting the desired menu item. Starting playback from the se- lected menu item. Operating the DVD menu by di- rectly touching the menu item. # When operating the DVD menu by directly touching the menu item, touch the icon to oper- ate. Returning to the normal DVD video display . Displaying arrow keys. # W ays to display the menu will differ depend- ing on the disc. # Depending on the contents of the DVD disc, this function may not work properly . In such cases, use the touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. Operating this unit â s iPod function from your iPod Y ou can listen to the sound from your iPod ap- plications using your car âÂÂs speakers, when App Mode is selected with following iPod models. ! iP od nano 1st generation ! iP od 5th generation APP mode is compatible with the following iP od models. ! iPhone 4 (sof tware version 4.1 or later) ! iPhone 3GS (sof tware version 4.1 or later) ! iPhone 3G (sof tware version 4.1 or later) ! iPhone (sof tware version 3.1.3 or later) ! iP od touch 3rd generation (software version 4.0 or later) ! iP od touch 2nd generation (software ver- sion 4.0 or later) ! iP od touch 1st generation (software version 3.1.3 or later) ! While this function is in use, the iPod will not turn off even if the ignition key is turned off . Operate the iPod to turn off the power . 1 Switch the control mode to App Mode. Refer to Introduction of video playback opera- tions on page 18. Refer to Introduction of sound playback opera- tions on page 21. 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a video/song and play . <QRB3126-A/N>37 En 37 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Note The following functions are still accessible from the unit even if the control mode is set to App Mode . However , the operation will depend on your appli- cations. ! P ausing ! F ast for warding/reversing ! T racking up/down ! Moving to a chapter up/down Random play (shuffle) iP od-videos/so ngs can be played back in ran- dom order . ! Songs â Play back videos/songs in the se- lected list in random order . ! Albums â Play back videos/songs from a randomly selected album in order . ! Folder â Play back songs/tracks in the se- lected folder in random order . ! Disc â Play back songs/tracks in the se- lected disc in random order . ! On â Play back files in random order within the repeat range, Folder and Disc . ! Off â Cancel random play . Playing all songs in rand om order (shuffle all) (F unction for iPod) This method plays all songs on the iPod randomly . Repeating playba ck ! Disc â Play through the current disc ! Chapter â Repeat the current chapter ! Title â Repeat the current title ! T rack â Repeat the current track ! File â Repeat the current file ! Folder â Repeat the current folder ! One â Repeat just the current video/song/ track ! All â Repeat all videos/songs in the se- lected list on the iP od Repeat all files ! This function cannot be operated during Video CD playback featuring PBC (playback control). ! If you per form chapter search, fast for ward/ reverse, frame-by-frame playback or slow motion playback, the repeat play will stop. ! When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA), playback is re- peated within the type of data currently playing even if Disc is selected. ! If you selec t another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to Disc. If you selec t USB or SD source, the repeat play range changes to All. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/ reverse during File, the repeat play range changes to Folder. ! If you per form title/chapter search or fast forward/reverse during Chapter, the repeat play range changes to OFF. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/ reverse during T rack , the repeat play range changes to Disc. ! When Folder is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing videos from your iPod (F unction for iPod) Videos can be played on this unit if an iPod with video capabilities is connected. ! This unit can play back âÂÂMovies âÂÂ, âÂÂMusic vi- deos âÂÂ, âÂÂVideo Podcast â and âÂÂTV show â which are downloaded from the iT unes store. ! Before you display the video screen, be sure to change the video setting on the iP od so that the iPod can output the video to an external device. 1 Display the iPod menus. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 Switch to iPod video mode. Video Switching to iPod video mode. <QRB3126-A/N>38 En 38 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
3 Play the video from the iPod. # If you want to switch to iP od music mode, touch the icon. Music Switching to iPod music mode. Browsing for a video/mu sic on the iPod (F unction for iPod) T o make operating and searching easy, opera- tions to control an iP od with this unit are de- signed to be as similar to the iPod as possible. Searching for a video/music by category 1 Display the iPod menus. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. Refer to Playing audio on page 21. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a video/music. ! Video Playlists (video playlists) ! Movies (movies) ! Music Videos (music videos) ! Video Podcasts (video podcasts) ! TV Shows (TV shows) ! Playlists (playlists) ! Artists (artists) ! Albums (albums) ! Songs (songs) ! Podcasts (podcasts) ! Genres (genres) ! Composers (composers) ! Audiobooks (audiobooks) 3 T ouch the title of the list that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired video/music. 4 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Searching the list by alphabet (F unction for iPod) 1 Select a category . Refer to Searching for a video/music by cate- gor y on this page. 2 Switch to alphabet search mode. Switching to alphabet search mode. Alphabet search mode is displayed. 3 T ouch the first letter of the title of the video/song you are looking for . While searching, touch panel key operation is not available. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch Cancel. 4 T ouch the title of the list that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song/video. 5 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Resume playback (Bookmark) (F unction for DVD video) By using the Bookmark function, you can re- sume playback from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. ! T o clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and hold the button during playback. ! The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. Frame-by-frame playback (F unction for DVD video/video CD/DivX file) <QRB3126-A/N>39 En 39 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Note Images during frame-by-frame playback may be unclear for some discs. Slow motion playback Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Images during slow motion playback may be unclear for some discs. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not available. Searching for the part you want to play Y ou can use the search function to find the part you want to play . F or DVD videos, you can select Title (title), Chapter (chapter) or 10key (numeric keypad). F or video CDs, you can select T rack (track) or 10key (numeric keypad). ! Chapter search is not available when disc playback is stopped. ! This function cannot be operated during some DVD videos or Video CD playback featuring PBC (playback control). 1 Start the search function. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 T ouch the desired search option (e.g., Chapter). 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the entered numbers, touch C . 4 Start playback from the selected part. Registering the numbers and start- ing playback. Note With discs featuring a menu, you can also use the DVD menu to make your selection. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) With DVDs/DivX files that provides audio play- back in different languages and different audio systems (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.), you can switch between languages/audio systems during playback. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display. ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using Video Setup menu. F or details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 60. ! Depending on the setting, the video may not be played back with the audio system used to record the DVD. ! Y ou will return to normal playback if you change the Audio during fast forward/fast re- wind, pause or slow motion playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs/DivX files featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using Video Setup menu. F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 60. ! Y ou will return to normal playback if you change the Subtitle during fast forward/fast rewind, pause or slow motion playback. <QRB3126-A/N>40 En 40 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is displayed. Use the Video Setup menu to turn the angle icon display on or off . For details, refer to Setting the multi-angle DVD display on page 60. Note Y ou will return to normal playback if you change the viewing angle during fast forward/fast rewind, pause or slow motion playback. Return to the specified scene (F unction for DVD video) This function cannot be used if a specified scene has not been preprogrammed on the DVD disc. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. When playing video CDs, you can switch be- tween stereo and monaural audio output. ! This function is not available when disc playback is stopped. ! L R â left and right ! Left â lef t ! Right â right ! Mix â mixing left and right Y ou may not be able to select or use this func- tion depending on the disc and the playback location. PBC playback (F unction for Video CDs) During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. 1 Start the search function. Refer to Playing moving images on page 18. 2 T ouch 10key to display the numeric keypad. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu number . 4 Start playback from the selected part. Registering the numbers and start- ing playback. Notes ! Y ou can display the menu by touching Return during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of a Video CD cannot be can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), you cannot select the re- peat play range or use the search function. Selecting tracks from the track title list Y ou can select tracks to playback using the track title list which is a list of the tracks re- corded on a disc. 1 Display the track title list. Refer to Playing audio on page 21. 2 T ouch your favorite track title. Playback begins. Selecting files from the file name list (F unction for compressed audio/DivX/JPEG) File name list is a list of file names (or folder names) from which you can select a file (or folder) to play back. 1 Display the file (or folder) name list. Refer to Playing audio on page 21. <QRB3126-A/N>41 En 41 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. 2 T ouch your favorite file (or folder) name. # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat this operation to select the de- sired file name. # If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 3 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Using advanced sound retriever Automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. Off â â ! is more effective than . Changing audiobook spee d (F unction for iPod) ! â Playback at a speed faster than normal ! â Playback at normal speed ! â Playback at a speed slower than nor- mal Displaying lists related to the currently playing song (Link Search) (F unction for iPod) 1 Start Link Search. Refer to Introduction of sound playback opera- tions on page 21. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to play . ! Artist â Displays an album list of the artist currently being played. ! Album â Displays a song list from the album currently being played. ! Genre â Displays an album list from the genre currently being played. # T o cancel searching, touch Cancel. 3 T ouch the title of the list that you want to play . 4 Start playback of the selected list. Starting playback of the selected list. Playing DivX â VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of content, the remaining number of times it can be played is shown on-screen. Y ou can then decide whether or not to play the disc. ! If there is no limit to the number of times the DivX VOD content can be viewed, then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. ! Y ou can confirm the number of times that the content can be played by checking the number displayed af ter Remaining Views:. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD contents on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD contents provider . For details on your registration code, refer to Displaying the DivX â VOD registration code on page 63. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. <QRB3126-A/N>42 En 42 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
% If a message is displayed after loading a disc containing DivX VOD content, touch Play. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, touch Next Play. # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, touch Stop. Capture an image in JPEG files Y ou can capture image data and use it as wall- paper . Images can be stored and recalled ea- sily in this unit. ! Only one image can be stored on this unit. Old image is over written with the new one. 1 Pause the slideshow when the desired image is displayed. Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. Refer to Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations on page 26. 2 Capture the image. Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. Refer to Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations on page 26. 3 When Do you save this image? is dis- played, touch Y es. While storing the image to this unit, Saving the image Don âÂÂt switch off the battery . is displayed. When the process is finished, Image saved is displayed. # T o cancel the storage process, touch No . Changing the wide screen mode Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 picture. 1 Display the screen mode. Refer to Introduction of video playback opera- tions on page 18. Refer to Introduction of still image playback op- erations on page 25. Refer to Introduction of still image playback as a slideshow operations on page 26. 2 T ouch the desired wide mode setting. Full (full screen) The 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. Just (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally toward the edges of the screen, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even when viewing on a wide screen. Cinema (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal for a cinema- sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside the picture. Zoom (zoom) The 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a cinema sized picture (wide screen picture). Normal (normal) The 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Y ou cannot operate this function while driving. ! Different settings can be stored for each video source. ! When a video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! The video image will appear coarser when viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode. <QRB3126-A/N>43 En 43 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Selecting and playing the Quick Mix/sta tion list T ouch the list for your P andora stations to se- lect one of them to play . 1 Display the Quick Mix/station list. Refer to Introduction of P andora operations on page 23. 2 Change the sort order . Y ou can sort the items in the list al- phabetically. Y ou can sort the items in the list in order of the da tes on which the items were created. 3 Select QuickMix or the desired station. Y ou can play only one song at a time from a shuffled mix of several sta- tions. Storing song information (bookmarks) With the Bookmark function, you can select an artist or a song to add to Bookmarks. 1 Switch to song information (bookmark) storing mode. Refer to Introduction of P andora operations on page 23. The song informatio n (bookmark) storing mode is displayed. 2 Storing or canceling a bookmark. Adding informatio n for the song cur- rently playing to Boo kmarks. Adding artist information for the song currently playing to Book- marks. Canceling a bookmark. Switching the XM/SIRIUS channel selec tion mode Y ou have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by categor y . When selecting by number , channels in any categor y can be selected. Select by categor y to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular categor y . Mode All CH (channel number select setting) â Mode Category (channel categor y select setting) Selecting a SIRIUS channel from a channel category Channels are organized into various program categories, e.g. Rock, Classic, Jazz while lis- tening to a SIRIUS station. Y ou can specify channels by selecting the desired categor y . 1 Select channel category selection mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Mode All CH (channel number select setting) â Mode Category (channel categor y select setting) 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired chan- nel category . 3 T ouch c or d on the buttons to select the desired channel in the selected channel category . Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! The channel list shows all the channels during Mode All CH mode, and the chan- nels included in the selected categor y dur- ing Mode Category mode. <QRB3126-A/N>44 En 44 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
1 Display the preset channel list. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 Switch the channel list mode. Switching the channel list mode to the channel name or the artist name/song title. 3 T ouch the desired channel that you want to listen to. Selecting an XM/SIRIUS channel directly Y ou can select an XM/SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number . 1 Display the preset channel list. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 Switch to direct input display . Switching to direct input display. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan- nel number . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C . 4 Select the XM/SIRIUS channel of the en- tered number . The XM/SIRIUS channel of the entered num- ber is selected. Selecting the XM/SIRIUS chan nel of the entered number . Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make a MyMix song playlist. When a song in the MyMix playlist is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune in to the other station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM/ SIRIUS tuner . ! The track itself is NOT downloaded. Only the song title and artist name are stored. Making the MyMix playlist Y ou can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name are stored to this unit. The MyMix function will start when you listen to a song that matches a song title and its ar- tist name in the MyMix playlist. % Store the song title and artist name. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are stored, and a confirmation message appears. # T o delete a song from the MyMix playlist, refer to Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for XM tuner on the next page and Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for SIRIUS tuner on page 47. # (XM tuner) The song title and artist name of up to 12 tracks can be stored. Old tracks will be overwritten when saving more than 12 tracks. # (SIRIUS tuner) The song title and artist name of up to 10 tracks can be stored. # Y ou cannot store the song title or the artist name when â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ â is displayed for the title information. # Y ou cannot store song titles or artist names from channel 000. # Stored titles may not be displayed correctly . When a song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast (XM tuner) As soon as a song in the MyMix playlist starts being broadcast on a different station, a mes- sage is displayed. T ouch Ye s to switch to that station, and you can listen to that song. (SIRIUS tuner) As soon as a stored song starts being broad- cast on a different station, a song alert is dis- played. <QRB3126-A/N>45 En 45 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Switching to the other station to lis- ten to that track. Not tuning in to the oth er station. ! (XM tuner) If you would rather not to tune in to the other station, touch No. ! If an alert for a song in the MyMix playlist is set to off, no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Set- ting up a song alert on this page. ! If the stored title and the title of the song being broadcast differ , no alert will be pro - vided even if they are the same song. T ur ning the MyMix function on or off Y ou can turn the MyMix function off and stop the alerts for all the songs in the MyMix play- list. T o restart, turn this function on. The MyMix function is on as the default set- ting. % T urn the MyMix function on or off. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Setting up a song alert Y ou can set up an alert (on or off) for each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert set- ting. Set the alert to on to receive an alert when the song is broadcast, or set it to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 Switch to memo edit mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 Select the song title for which you want to tur n the alert on or off. (XM tuner) The check mark is removed, and the alert for that song is off . (SIRIUS tuner) Selecting the song title for which you want to turn the alert off. 3 T ur n the alert on or off. (SIRIUS tuner) T urning the alert on or off . Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for XM tuner Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix play- list. 1 Switch to memo edit mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 Delete the song title. Deleting the song title. Deleting all the songs in the MyMix playlist. That song will be deleted from the MyMix play- list. A message to confirm deletion will appear . 3 T ouch Y es. # T o cancel deletion, touch No . Deleting a song from the MyMix playlist for SIRIUS tuner Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix play- list. 1 Switch to memo edit mode. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. <QRB3126-A/N>46 En 46 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
2 Select the song title that you want to delete. Selecting the song title that you want to delete. 3 Delete the song title. Deleting the song title. A message to confirm deletion will appear . 4 T ouch Y es. That song will be deleted from the MyMix play- list. # T o cancel deletion, touch No . Using the Game Alert function This system can alert you when games invol- ving your favorite teams are about to start. T o use this function you need to set up a game alert for the teams in advance. ! This function is available for SIR-PNR2/SIR - PNR2C. Selecting teams for Game Alert 1 Start Game Alert setup. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 Select a desired league in League Switching the league name. 3 Select a desired team in T eam. Switching the team nam e. 4 T ur n the alert on or off. T urning the alert on or off . The game alert function is activated for that team. # When you have already selected 12 teams, FULL is displayed and additional teams cannot be selected. In this case, first delete a selected team and then try again. 5 Repeat these steps to select other teams. Up to 12 teams can be selected. Switching the Game Alert on or off Once you select the teams, you need to turn the Game Alert function on. The Game Alert function is on at the default setting. When a game of a selected team starts When a game of the selected team is about to start (or is currently playing) on a different sta- tion, a game alert is displayed. Switching to the other station to lis- ten to the game. Not tuning in to the oth er station. <QRB3126-A/N>47 En 47 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Displaying game information If any games of the selected teams are cur- rently playing, you can display information on the games and tune in to the broadcast chan- nel. 1 Display the game information for the selected team. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. 2 T ouch c or d to select a game. The game is displayed, followed by more de- tailed game information. ! The game score will be updated automati- cally . 3 Switch to the other station to listen to the game. Switching to the other station to lis- ten to the game. # If you have not selected any teams, NOT SET is displayed. # When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing, NO GAME is displayed. Displaying the Radio ID Channel number selection setting If you selec t CH000, the ID code is displayed. % Select CH000. Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Switching the SIRIUS display ! Actions will differ depending on the con- nected SIRIUS tuner . % T ouch SIRIUS information to switch the SIRIUS display . Refer to Introduction of XM/SIRIUS tuner opera- tions on page 29. Channel number âÂÂChannel name âÂÂCategor y name âÂÂArtist name âÂÂSong title/Title name â Composer name âÂÂPlay time Note Play time is displayed during the Instant Replay mode. Using the Instant Replay function The following functions can be operated in In- stant Replay mode. ! T o use this function, a P ioneer SIRIUS bus inter face (e.g. CD-SB10) is required. ! T o use this function, a SIRIUS plug-and- play unit with an Instant Replay Function is required. ! F or details, refer to the SIRIUS plug-and- play unit âÂÂs manuals. % T o exit from Instant Replay mode, se- lect another source or touch the following icon. Exiting from Instant Replay mode. % Select a track Press c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). % Fast forward or reverse Press and hold c or d ( TRACK/SEEK). % Pause and play Playing and pausing. Switching the seek mode There are two seek tuning settings, one is Seek HD (Digital broadcasting stations seek) and the other is Seek All (normal seek). Seek All âÂÂSeek HD <QRB3126-A/N>48 En 48 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Switching the reception mode If the reception for a digital broadcast be- comes poor , this unit automatically switches to the analog broadcast of the same fre- quency . If this function is set to D/A Auto, the tuner switches between digital broadcast and analog broadcast automatically. If this func- tion is set to Analog, the tuner will only re- ceive analog broadcasts. D/A Auto âÂÂAnalog Note If SEEK MODE is set to Seek HD and BLENDING is set to Analog , the tuner cannot receive broad- casts. In this case, the seek mode or reception mode is changed automatically as follows: ! When SEEK MODE is set to Seek HD, if you switch BLENDING from D/A Auto to Analog, SEEK MODE is changed to Seek All . ! When BLENDING is set to Analog, if you switch SEEK MODE from Seek All to Seek HD , BLENDING is changed to D/A Auto . Calling a number in the phone book (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) The phone book in your cellular phone will be transferred automatically when the phone is connected to this unit. After finding the number you want to call in the phone book, you can select the entr y and make the call. 1 Switch to phone book mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. The phone book display appears. 2 Select the phone number list. The detailed phone number list of the selected entr y is displayed. 3 Select the phone number . # If you want to store the phone number , touch and hold the list. 4 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 5 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Note Depending on the cellular phone, the phone book may not be transferred automatically . In this case, operate your cellular phone to transfer the phone book. The visibility of this unit should be on. Refer to Switching visible unit on page 53. Selecting a number by alphabet search mode (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) If a lot of numbers are registered in the phone book, you can search for the phone number by alphabet search mode. 1 Switch to phone book mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. The phone book display appears. 2 T ouch ABC to switch to alphabet search mode. 3 T ouch the first letter of the entry you are looking for . The Phone Book entries starting with that let- ter (e.g. âÂÂBen âÂÂ, âÂÂBrian â and âÂÂBurt â when âÂÂB â is selected) will be displayed. # If you want to change the character to Rus- sian, touch the icon. T o return to English, touch the icon again. Changing the character to Russian. # The order of the first name and last name may be different from that of the cellular phone. 4 T ouch the list to display the phone number list of the selected entry . # If several phone numbers are included in an entry, select one by touching the list. <QRB3126-A/N>49 En 49 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
# If you want to switch to the call histor y list, touch the icon. Switching to the call histor y list. 5 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 6 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Using the missed, received and dialed call lists (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) The 80 most recent calls dialed, rece ived, and missed are stored in the memory. Y ou can browse them and call numbers from these lists. 1 Switch to the call history list. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 Select Missed Calls, Dialled Calls or Received Calls. Displaying the received call list. Displaying the dialed call list. Displaying the missed call list. 3 T ouch the list number to select a phone number . Name and phone number are displayed in the detailed list. # If you want to store the phone number , touch and hold the list. 4 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 5 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Using the missed, received and dialed call lists on the optional Bluetooth adap ter (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) The 80 most recent calls dialed, rece ived, and missed are stored in the memory. Y ou can browse them and call numbers from these lists. 1 Switch to the call history list. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. 3 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 4 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. Setting automatic answering If this function is on, this unit automatically answers all incoming calls. % T urn automatic answering on or off. (AVH-P4300DVD) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. (AVH-P3300BT) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. <QRB3126-A/N>50 En 50 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
Adjusting the other party â s listening volume (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) T o maintain the good sound quality, this unit can adjust the other party âÂÂs listening volume. If the volume is not loud enough for the other party , use this function. % Select Far -End VOL. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 1 âÂÂ2 âÂÂ3 # This function can be performed even while talking on the phone. # Settings can be stored for each device. Switching the ring tone Y ou can select whether or not to use this unit âÂÂs ring tone. If this function is set to on, the ring tone for this unit will sound. 1 Connect your cellular phone to this unit. 2 T ur n ring tone on or off. (AVH-P4300DVD) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. (AVH-P3300BT) Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Using the preset dial lists (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) Y ou can easily store up to six phone numbers as presets. 1 Display the preset screen. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch one of preset dial keys to select the desired phone number . # If you want to delete a preset phone number , touch and hold the preset dial key. 3 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 4 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Making a call by entering phone number (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) Wed 28 may 1 12:45 PM ABCDEHGHI 012345678901 01 123 456 789 * 0 # C Off Important Be sure to park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake when per forming this op- eration. 1 Switch to the entering phone number mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch the number icons to input the numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. 3 Make the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 4 End the call. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. <QRB3126-A/N>51 En 51 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Note Entering phone number mode cannot be oper- ated unless a Bluetooth telephone is connected to this unit. Setting the private mode (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) During a conversation, you can switch to pri- vate mode (talk directly on your cellular phone). Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. Pairing from this unit (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) Connection 01: Phone1 02: Phone2 03: Phone3 04: Phone4 05: Phone5 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Connection to select a device. 3 Start to search. Starting to search. While searching, is displayed and when available devices are found, the device names or Bluetooth device addresses (if names can- not be obtained) are displayed. # If you want to switch between the device names and Bluetooth device addresses, touch the icon. Switching betwee n the device names and Bluetooth device ad- dresses. # T o cancel searching, touch Stop. # If five devices are already paired, Memory Full is displayed and pairing cannot be performed. In such cases, delete a paired device first. Refer to this page. # If no device can be found, Not Found is dis- played. In such cases, check the status of the Bluetooth device and search again. 4 T ouch a device name to select the de- vice you want to connect to. While connecting, Pairing is displayed. If the connection is established, Paired is displayed. # If the connection fails, Error is displayed. In such cases, tr y again from the beginning. # The PIN code is set to 0000 as the default, but can be changed. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 54. # When establishing connection, the icon is dis- played. T ouch the icon to disconnect the device. Disconnecting a Bluetooth device. # If you want to delete a paired Bluetooth tele- phone, display Delete OK?. T ouch Ye s to delete the device. Deleting a paired device. # Never turn the unit off while the paired Blue- tooth telephone is being deleted. Using a Bluetooth device to pair (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) <QRB3126-A/N>52 En 52 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
If you cannot open the connection between your Bluetooth device and this unit from your Bluetooth device, you can use this function to establish a connection. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Special Device to select the spe- cial device. # Bluetooth devices that are difficult to establish a connection with are called special devices. If your Bluetooth device is listed as a special device, select the appropriate one. 3 T ouch the special device list to open the connection. This unit is now on standby for a connection with the Bluetooth device. # If five devices are already paired, Memory Full is displayed and pairing cannot be performed. In such cases, delete a paired device first. Refer to the previous page. 4 Use your Bluetooth device to establish a connection. The connection method is different depending on the Bluetooth device. Refer to the manual for your Bluetooth device to establish a con- nection. While connecting, Pair your phone is dis- played. If the connection is established, Paired is displayed. # If the connection fails, Error is displayed. In such cases, tr y again from the beginning. # The PIN code is set to 0000 as the default, but can be changed. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on the next page. Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) If this function is set to on, a connection be- tween your Bluetooth device and this unit will take place automatically as soon as the two devices are less than a few meters apart. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Auto Connect to turn automatic connection on. If your Bluetooth device is ready for a Blue- tooth wireless connection, a connection to this unit will automatically be established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch Auto Connect again. 3 T ur n your vehicle â s ACC switch off and on. Switching visible unit (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) This function sets whether or not to make this unit visible to the other device. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Visibility to select visibility off. ! T o turn visibility on, touch Visibility again. Displaying Bluetooth Device address (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) This unit displays its Bluetooth device ad- dress. <QRB3126-A/N>53 En 53 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch Device Information to display de- vice information. The Bluetooth device address is displayed. Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection (F unction of AVH-P3300BT) T o connect your Bluetooth device to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to enter a PIN code on your Bluetooth device to verify the connection. The default code is 0000 , but you can change it with this function. 1 Display the Bluetooth Connection Menu. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 27. 2 T ouch PIN Code Input to select PIN code input. 3 T ouch 1 to 0 to input pin code. 4 After inputting PIN code (up to 8 di- gits), store in this unit. Storing the PIN code in this unit. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) A Bluetooth wireless connection can be estab- lished from your phone by putting the unit into initiating a connection mode. Y ou may need to refer to the operation manual that came with your phone if you are unsure how to initiate a connection from your phone. 1 Put the unit in initiating a connection mode. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 Use a cellular phone to connect to this unit. # Operation varies depending on the type of cel- lular phone. # Y ou may need to enter the link code on your cellular phone to complete the connection. Registering a connecte d cellular phone (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) Y ou can register a phone that is temporaril y connected to this unit in order to take full ad- vantage of the features available with Blue- tooth wireless technology. Only one cellular phone can be registered. 1 Start registering a connected cellular phone. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 Use cellular phone to register to this unit. If registration is successful, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the se- lected assignment. # If the assignment is already taken, the device name will be displayed. T o replace an assignment with a new phone, first delete the current assign- ment. # If registration failed, the device name of the connected phone will not be displayed in the se- lected assignment. In such cases, return to step 1 and tr y again. <QRB3126-A/N>54 En 54 Section 14 Detailed instr uctions
V oice recognition (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) If your cellular phone features voice recogni- tion technology , you can make a call by voice commands. ! Operation varies depending on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone for detailed instructions. 1 Start voice recognition. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. 2 Say the name of your contact aloud. Connecting a Bluetooth audio player (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) A Bluetooth wireless connection can be estab- lished by putting the unit into initiating a con- nection mode. % Put the unit in initiating a connection mode. Refer to Bluetooth audio operations on page 33. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to this unit is automatically established. Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) If this function is set to on, a connection be- tween your Bluetooth device and this unit will take place automatically as soon as the two devices are less than a few meters apart. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 T ouch Auto Connect to turn automatic connection on. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. If your Bluetooth device is ready for a Blue- tooth wireless connection, a connection to this unit will automatically be established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch Auto Connect again. 2 T ur n your vehicle â s ACC switch off and on. Displaying Bluetooth Device address (F unction of AVH-P4300DVD) This unit displays its Bluetooth Device ad- dress. % T ouch Device Information to display de- vice information. Refer to Introduction of Bluetooth telephone op- erations on page 32. The Bluetooth Device address is displayed. <QRB3126-A/N>55 En 55 Section 14 Detailed instructions Detailed instr uctions
Introduction of menu operations Audio Fader/Balance F/R 0 L/R 0 Super Bass On High Off L/R îÂÂ0 Graphic EQ Auto EQ Sonic Center Control Loudness Subwoofer 5 4 3 21 1 Display menus. Refer to Common operations for menu set- tings/lists on page 15. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the menu to be adjusted. ! T ouch panel keys 1 Video Setup Menu Refer to Setting up the DVD player on page 60. 2 Audio function menu Refer to Audio Adjustments on the next page. 3 System menu Refer to System settings on page 64. 4 Entertainment menu Refer to Entertainment se ttings on page 69. 5 Custom menu Y ou can choose menus within each menu (Audio function menu, etc.) and register them to this custom menu. Refer to Customizing menus on page 70. Notes ! Y ou can display the Video Setup menu when a Disc, USB or SD source is selected. ! If you start the Video Setup menu, playback is stopped. ! Y ou cannot display the Audio function menu when the mute function is on or a JPEG file is playing. <QRB3126-A/N>56 En 56 Section 15 Menu operations
Audio Adjustments Note When selecting FM as the source, you cannot switch to Source Level Adjuster. Using fade r/balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting to provide an ideal listening environment for all of the occupied seats. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on the previous page. 2 T ouch Fader/Balance on the audio func- tion menu. 3 T ouch a or b to adjust the front/rear speaker balance. Range: Front:15 to Rear:15 # Select F/R: 0 L/R: 0 when only using two speakers. # The front/rear speaker balance cannot be ad- justed when the rear output setting is Subwoofer . Refer to Setting the r ear output and subwoofer controller on page 64. 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the left/right speaker balance. Range: Left:15 to Right:15 Using the equalizer Y ou can adjust the equalization to match the car âÂÂs interior acous tic characteristics as de- sired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves. Display Equalizer curve Powerful P ower ful Natural Natural Display Equalizer curve V ocal V ocal Custom1 Custom 1 Custom2 Custom 2 Flat Flat Super Bass Super bass ! The equalizer cur ves for Custom1 and Custom2 can be adjusted. ! Y ou cannot select Custom1 and Custom2 when using the auto-equalizer . ! When Flat , no changes are made to the sound. Y ou can check the effects of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and another equalizer cur ve. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on the previous page. 2 T ouch Graphic EQ on the audio function menu. # Y ou can select Graphic EQ when Auto EQ function is off . 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired item. Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂCustom1 â Custom2 âÂÂFlat âÂÂSuper Bass Adjusting the 8-band graphic equalizer Y ou can adjust the level of each band for the equalizer curves. ! A separate Custom1 cur ve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments when a cur ve other than Custom2 is se- lected, the equalizer cur ve settings will be stored in Custom1. ! A Custom2 cur ve that is common for all sources can be created. If you make adjust- ments when the Custom2 cur ve is se- lected, the Custom2 cur ve will be updated. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on the previous page. <QRB3126-A/N>57 En 57 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
2 T ouch Graphic EQ on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired item. Powerful âÂÂNatural âÂÂV ocal âÂÂCustom1 â Custom2 âÂÂFlat âÂÂSuper Bass 4 T ouch the Equalizer band to adjust. 5 T ouch a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Range: 12dB to â 12dB # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is an equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto EQ (refer to Auto EQ (auto -equaliz- ing) on page 66). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . If you connect an optional microphone to this unit, you can use this function. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Auto EQ to turn the auto-equali- zer on or off. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto EQ has not been carried out. Using sonic center control Sound that is suited for the listening position can easily be created with this function. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Sonic Center Control on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select a listening posi- tion. Range: Left:7 to Right:7 Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-frequency ranges at low volume. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Loudness on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. Off (off) âÂÂLow (low) âÂÂMid (mid) âÂÂHigh (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off. ! The cut-off frequency and output level can be adjusted when the subwoofer output is on. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Subwoofer on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch On or Off next to Subwoofer to turn the subwoofer output on or off. 4 T ouch Normal or Reverse next to Phase to select the phase of subwoofer output. 5 T ouch c or d next to Level to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . Range: 6 to â 24 6 T ouch c or d next to Frequency to se- lect the cut-off frequency . 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo - fer . <QRB3126-A/N>58 En 58 Section 15 Menu operations
Boosting the bass Y ou can boost the bass level. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. Range: 0 to 6 Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch c or d next to Frequency to se- lect cut-off frequency . Off (off) âÂÂ50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz â 100Hz â 125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels With SL A (source level adjustment), the vo - lume levels of each source can be adjusted to prevent significant differences between sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Display the audio function menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 3 T ouch Source Level Adjuster on the audio function menu. 4 T ouch a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Range: 4 to â 4 Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with this function. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are automatically set to the same source level adjustment volume. ! iP od and USB storage device are automati- cally set to the same source level adjustment volume. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are automa- tically set to the same source level adjustment volume. <QRB3126-A/N>59 En 59 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
Setting up the DVD player Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. When available, the subtitles will be displayed in the selected language. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Subtitle Language on the Video Setup menu. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 3 T ouch the desired language. The subtitle language is set. # If you have selected Others, refer to When you select Others on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not available, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching the icon during playback. (Refer to Playing moving images on page 18.) ! The setting made here will not be affected even if the subtitle language is switched dur- ing playback using Subtitle. When you select Others A language code input display is shown when Others is selected. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 103. 1 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the entered numbers, touch C . 2 Registering the code. Registering the code. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Audio Language on the Video Setup menu. An audio language menu is displayed. 3 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected Others, refer to When you select Others on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not available, the language specified on the disc is used. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching Audio during playback. (Refer to Playing moving images on page 18.) ! The setting made here will not be affected even if the audio language is switched during playback using Audio. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language in which the menus recorded on a disc are displayed. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Menu Language on the Video Setup menu. A menu language menu is displayed. 3 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected Others, refer to When you select Others on this page. Note If the selected language is not available, the lan- guage specified on the disc is displayed. Setting the multi-angle DVD display The angle icon can be set so it appears on scenes where the angle can be switched. <QRB3126-A/N>60 En 60 Section 15 Menu operations
1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Multi Angle on the Video Setup menu to tur n angle icon display on or off. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display : a wide screen display that has a width-to-height ratio (TV as- pect ratio) of 16:9, and regular display that has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to V OUT . ! When using regular display, select either Letter Box or Pan Scan . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you selec t the TV aspect ratio, the unit âÂÂs display will change to the same setting. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch TV Aspect on the Video Setup menu to select the TV aspect ratio. T ouch TV Aspect repeatedly until the desired aspect ratio appears. ! 16 : 9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as is (initial setting) ! Letter Box â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands on the top and bottom of the screen ! Pan Scan â The picture is cut short on the right and left sides of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify Pan Scan , the disc is played back in Letter Box display even if you select the Pan Scan setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. ! The TV aspect ratio cannot be changed for some discs. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs in- structions. Setting the slide show interval JPEG files can be viewed as a slide show on this unit. In this setting, the inter val between each image can be set. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Time Per Photo Slide on the Video Setup menu to select the slide show interval. T ouch Time Per Photo Slide repeatedly until the desired setting appears. ! 5sec â JPEG images switch at inter vals of 5 seconds ! 10sec â JPEG images switch at inter vals of 10 seconds ! 15sec â JPEG images switch at inter vals of 15 seconds ! Manual â JPEG images can be switched manually Setting parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set paren- tal lock to the desired level. ! When you have a parental lock level set and play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In such cases, playback will begin when the correct code number is entered. Setting the code number and level A code number must be registered in order to play back discs with parental lock. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Parental on the Video Setup menu. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the entered numbers, touch C . <QRB3126-A/N>61 En 61 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
4 Registering the code. Registering the code. The code number is set, and the level can now be set. 5 T ouch 1 to 8 to select the desired level. 6 T ouch Enter. The parental lock level is set. ! 8 â Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting) ! 7 to 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is stored on the disc. Look for the level indication written on the disc package, included literature or on the disc itself . P arental lock of this unit is not pos- sible if a parental lock level is not stored on the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only for certain levels of scenes. The play- back of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the disc. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Parental on the Video Setup menu. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the registered code number . 4 Registering the code. Registering the code. This sets the code number , and the level can now be changed. # If you enter an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and enter the correct code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 5 T ouch 1 to 8 to select the desired level. 6 T ouch Enter. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Press RESET. Setting the DivX subtitle file Y ou can select whether or not to display DivX external subtitles. ! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when Custom is selected if no DivX exter- nal subtitle files exist. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DivX Subtitle on the Video Setup menu to select the desired subtitle setting. ! Original â Display the DivX subtitles ! Custom â Display the DivX external subti- tles Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more than 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be displayed. <QRB3126-A/N>62 En 62 Section 15 Menu operations
Displaying the DivX â VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) contents on this unit, the unit must first be re- gistered with a DivX VOD contents provider . F or registration, generate a DivX VOD registra- tion code and submit it to your provider . ! Keep a record of the code as you will need it when you register your unit to the DivX VOD provider . 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DivX VOD on the Video Setup menu. Registration Code and Deregistration Code appear . 3 T ouch Registration Code. Y our registration code is displayed. Displaying the deregistration code If your device is already activated, deregister it by entering the deregistration code. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DivX VOD on the Video Setup menu. 3 T ouch Deregistration Code. # T o cancel deregistration, touch Cancel. 4 T ouch OK. The deregistration is complete. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with a DVD menu is in- serted, this unit will cancel the menu automa- tically and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. 1 Display the Video Setup menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch DVD Auto Play to turn automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch DVD Auto Play again. <QRB3126-A/N>63 En 63 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
System settings Switching the auxiliary setting Activate this setting when using an auxiliar y device connected to this unit. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch AUX Input on the system menu to tur n AUX Input on or off. Setting A V input Activate this setting when using an external video component connected to this unit. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch A V Input on the system menu to turn A V Input on or off. Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( Full) or subwoofer ( Subwoofer) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to Subwoofer, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub- woofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for a rear full-range speaker connection ( Full ). 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Rear Speaker on the system menu to switch the subwoofer output or full-range speaker . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select Full (full-range speaker). # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select Subwoofer (subwoofer). Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there will be no output unless you turn the subwoofer out- put on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 58). ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in the audio menu will return to the factor y settings. ! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Switching sound muting/ attenuation Sound from this system is automatically muted or attenuated when a signal from equipment with a mute function is received. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Mute/A TT until the desired set- ting appears. T ouch Mute/A TT until the desired setting ap- pears in the display. ! Mute â Muting ! AT T â 20dB â Attenuation ( AT T â 20dB has a stronger effect than AT T â 10dB) ! AT T â 10dB â Attenuation ! Off â T urns the sound muting/attenuation off <QRB3126-A/N>64 En 64 Section 15 Menu operations
Notes ! When Mute is displayed, the sound is turned off and no audio adjustments can be made. ! When AT T is displayed, the sound is attenu- ated and only the volume can be adjusted. (No other audio adjustments can be made.) ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Selecting the menu language The menu language can be selected from four languages. If text information such as the title name, artist name or a comment is embedded in a Eur- opean language, they can also be displayed on this unit. ! The language can be changed for the fol- lowing: â System menu â Video Setup â On-screen display â Multi language setting for DivX â Language for cautions Some operations on this unit are prohib- ited from use while driving or require careful attention when operated. In such cases, a caution will appear on the display . Y ou can change the language for caution messages with this setting. ! If the embedded language and the selected language setting are not the same, text in- formation may not display properly . ! Some characters may not be displayed properly . 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch System Language on the system menu to select the desired language. 3 T ouch the desired language. English (English) âÂÂFrançais (F rench) â Español (Spanish) âÂÂPortuguês (Portuguese) Clearing Bluetooth memory (AVH-P3300BT only) Important Never turn the unit off while the Bluetooth mem- ory is being cleared. 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Bluetooth Memory Clear on the system menu. 4 T ouch Clear. After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch OK to delete the mem- or y. # If you do not want to clear the memor y , touch Cancel . Updating Bluetooth connection software (AVH-P3300BT only) This function is used to update this unit with the latest software. For information on the soft- ware and updating, refer to our website. Important Never turn the unit off and never disconnect the phone while the software is being updated. 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Bluetooth Software Update. 4 T ouch Start to display the data transfer mode. # Follow the on-screen instructions to finish up- dating the software. <QRB3126-A/N>65 En 65 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
Displaying the Bluetooth system version (AVH-P3300BT only) If this unit fails to operate properly , you may need to consult your dealer for repair . In such cases, you may be asked to specif y the system version. Perform the following procedure to check the version on this unit. 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 3 T ouch Bluetooth Version Information to display to the version of the Bluetooth module of this unit. Setting the rear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror-reve rsed images. Otherwise, the screen image will appear re- versed. This unit features a function that automatically switches to the rear view camera video ( R.C IN ) when a rear view camera is installed on your car and the gear shift is moved to the RE- VERSE (R) position. (For more details, con- sult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shift to REVERSE (R) and confirm that the rear view camera video is shown on the display . ! Change this setting if the display switches to the rear view camera video by error while you are driving for ward. ! T o stop watching the rear view camera video and return to the source display , press and hold MUTE. ! T ouch the RearView source icon to display the rear view camera image while driving. T ouch the source icon again to turn the rear view camera off . For details, refer to Se- lecting a sour ce using the touch panel k eys on page 13. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Camera Polarity on the system menu to select the appropriate setting. ! Battery â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Ground â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Off â When a rear view camera is not con- nected to this unit Setting the video signal When you connect this unit to an AV equip- ment to this unit, select the suitable video sig- nal setting. ! As this function is initially set to Auto, the unit will automatically adjust the video sig- nal setting. ! Y ou can operate this function only for the video signal input into the AV input. 1 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Video Signal Setting on the func- tion menu. Video Signal Setting items are displayed. ! AV â Adjusts the AV video signal ! AUX â Adjusts the AUX video signal ! Camera â Adjusts the rear view camera video signal 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired video signal appears. Auto â PA L âÂÂNTSC âÂÂP AL-M âÂÂP AL-N â SECAM Auto EQ (auto-equalizing) The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car âÂÂs interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates an auto-equalizer cur ve based on that information. <QRB3126-A/N>66 En 66 Section 15 Menu operations
WARNING As a loud tone (noise) may be emitted from the speakers when measuring the car's interior acoustic characteristics, never per form auto T A or auto EQ while driving. CAUTION ! Thoroughly check the conditions before per- forming auto EQ as the speakers may be da- maged if these functions are per formed when: â The speakers are incorrectly connected. (F or example, when a rear speaker is con- nected as a subwoofer output.) â A speaker is connected to a power amp de- livering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capability. ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in batter y drainage. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified location. Before operating the auto EQ function ! Carr y out auto EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air condi- tioning switched off. Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car before carr ying out auto EQ. Sounds other than the mea- surement tone (surrounding sounds, en- gine sound , telephones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car in- terior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto EQ using the op- tional microphone. Using another micro- phone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car inter- ior acoustic characteristics. ! In order to per form auto EQ, the front speaker must be connected. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto EQ may not be possible if the power amp âÂÂs input level is set below the standard level. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn this LPF off before per forming auto EQ. Also set the cut- off fre- quency for the built-in LPF of an active sub- woofer to the highest frequency . ! The distance has been calculated by com- puter to be the optimum delay to give accu- rate results for the circumstances, so please continue to use this value. â The reflected sound within the car is strong and delays occur . â The LPF on active subwoofers or exter- nal amps delay the lower sounds. ! Auto EQ changes the audio settings as fol- lows: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to Using fader/ balance adjustment on page 57.) â The equalizer curve switches to Flat . (Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 57.) â The front, center and rear speakers will automatically be adjusted to a high pass filter setting. ! Previous settings for auto EQ will be over- written. Performing auto EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is quiet, close all the doors, windows and sun roof, and then tur n the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto EQ. 2 Fix the optional microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward. The auto EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto EQ. <QRB3126-A/N>67 En 67 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto EQ. 4 Display the system menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 5 T ouch Auto EQ Measurement to enter auto EQ measurement mode. 6 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on this unit. (AVH-P4300DVD) (AVH-P3300BT) 7 T ouch Start to start auto EQ. 8 When the 10-second countdown starts, get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds. A measurement tone (noise) is emitted from the speakers, and auto EQ measurement be- gins. When auto EQ is completed, Complete is dis- played. When the car âÂÂs interior acoustic characteris- tics cannot be measured correctly , an error message will be displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto EQ error messages on page 92.) # It takes about nine minutes for auto EQ mea- surement to be completed when all the speakers are connected. # T o stop auto EQ, touch Stop . # T o cancel auto EQ measurement mode during this procedure, touch the following touch panel key . Canceling auto EQ measurement mode. 9 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or another safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sun- light for an extended period, high tempera- tures may cause distortion, color change or malfunction. 10 Press h(eject) to close the panel. (AVH-P4300DVD only) Note (AVH-P4300DVD ) Do not press h (eject) to open or close the panel when you are using the microphone. <QRB3126-A/N>68 En 68 Section 15 Menu operations
Entertainment settings Selecting the illumination color This unit is equipped with multiple-color illu- mination. Direct selection from preset illumination colors Y ou can select an illumination color from the color list. 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Appearance. 3 T ouch Illumination and then touch a color on the list. Customizing the illumination color 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Appearance. 3 T ouch Illumination and then touch Custom. 4 Display the customizing menu. Displaying the customizing menu. 5 T ouch the color bar to customize the color . 6 T ouch c or d to fine-tune the color . 7 T ouch the icon and hold to store the customized color in the memory . Memo Storing the customized color in the memor y . The customized color has been stored in the memor y . The set color will be recalled from the memory the next time you touch the same icon. Selecting the OSD color The OSD color can be changed. 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Appearance. 3 T ouch Screen. 4 T ouch one of the colors on the list. Selecting the background display Y ou can switch the background that is dis- played when listening to a source. 1 Display the entertainment menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. 2 T ouch Background. 3 T ouch the desired setting. # If no JPEG images are stored in this unit, you cannot select photo. T o store a JPEG image to this unit, refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 43. <QRB3126-A/N>69 En 69 Section 15 Menu operations Menu operations
Customizing menus 1 Display menu columns to register . Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. Y ou can customize menus except Video Setup menu. 2 T ouch and hold the menu column to register it. # T o cancel registration, touch and hold the menu column again. 3 Display the custom menu and choose a registered menu. Refer to Introduction of menu operations on page 56. Note Y ou can register up to 12 columns. <QRB3126-A/N>70 En 70 Section 15 Menu operations
Changing the picture adjustment Y ou can adjust the Brightness (brightness), Contrast (contrast), Color (color) , Hue (hue), Dimmer (dimmer), T emperature (tempera- ture), Black Level (black level) and RGB Dot Adjust (RGB dot clock adjustment) for each source and rear view camera. ! Y ou cannot adjust Color, Hue, Contrast and Black Level for the audio source. 1 Press and hold MENU to display Picture Adjustment. The adjustment function names are displayed. 2 If you are adjusting the Picture Adjustment, select the unit. NAVI Adjusting the Picture Adjustmen t for the Navigation unit. Rear View Adjusting the Picture Adjustmen t for the rear view camera. Source Adjusting the Picture Adjustmen t for the source. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. Picture Adjustment items are displayed. ! Brightness â Adjusts the black intensity ! Contrast â Adjusts the contrast ! Color â Adjusts the color saturation ! Hue â Adjusts the tone of color (red or green is emphasized) ! Dimmer â Adjusts the brightness of the dis- play ! T emperature â Adjusts the color tempera- ture, resulting in a better white balance ! Black Level â Emphasizes the dark portions of images making the difference between bright and dark more distinct ! RGB Dot Adjust â Adjusts phase shifting by dot clock when a Navigation unit is con- nected # Y ou cannot adjust the picture adjustment for the rear view camera when Camera Polarity is set to Off. (Refer to Setting the rear view camera (back up camera) on page 66.) # Y ou can adjust Hue only when the color sys- tem is set to NTSC. # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d, the level of the selected item increases or decreases. # Dimmer can be adjusted from 1 to 48 . # T emperature can be adjusted from 3 to âÂÂ3 . 5 T ouch Black Level and RGB Dot Adjust to adjust. # Black Level can be set on or off . # RGB Dot Adjust can be set to 1 or 2 . Notes ! Y ou cannot operate this function while driving. ! Different Brightness/ Contrast/ Dimmer set- tings can be set for when the illumination switch is on and when it is off . Setting rear monitor output The output source for the rear monitor can be switched to the following: ! Front â The source on the front screen of this unit Disc â The video and sound from the DVD AV â The video and sound from AV input AUX â The source for AUX input Off â No source Note Y ou cannot play DivX files on the rear and front monitors at the same time. <QRB3126-A/N>71 En 71 Section 16 Other Functions Other Functions
Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po - sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! T ouch the screen gently for adjustment. F orcefully pressing the touch panel may da- mage the touch panel. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or me- chanical pen. Doing so may damage the screen. ! If the touch panel cannot be adjusted prop- erly , consult your local P ioneer dealer . 1 T ur n the unit off. Refer to Basic operations on page 13. 2 Press and hold MENU to display Picture Adjustment. 3 Press and hold MENU to start T ouch Panel Calibration. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 4 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold MENU . 5 Press MENU to complete 4-point adjust- ment. Data for the adjusted position is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while the data is being saved. 6 Press MENU to proceed to 16-point ad- justment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold MENU . 7 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen. After you touch all the marks, the data for the adjusted position is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while the data is being saved. 8 Press and hold MENU to complete the adjustment. Using an AUX source A separately sold auxiliar y device such as a VCR or portable device can be connected to this unit. When connected, the auxiliar y device is automatically recognized as an AUX source and is assigned to AUX. About AUX connection methods Y ou can connect auxiliar y devices to this unit. Mini pin plug cable ( AUX) When connecting an auxiliar y device using a mini plug cable iP ods and portable audio/video players can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iPod with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (such as the CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the connected iP od. ! A portable audio/video player can be con- nected by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) with an RCA cable (sold separately). However , depending on the cable, a reverse connec- tion between the red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable may be re- quired in order for the sound and video image to be reproduced correctly . <QRB3126-A/N>72 En 72 Section 16 Other Functions
% Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. Refer to Installation on the next page. Refer to What âÂÂs what on page 11. Using an exter nal unit An external unit refers to a Pioneer product, such as those which will be available in the fu- ture. Althou gh incompatible as a source, the basic functions of up to two external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external units are automatically allocated to external unit 1 or ex- ternal unit 2. The basic operations of the external unit are explained below . The allocated functions will differ depending on the connected external unit. For details concerning these functions, refer to the owner âÂÂs manual for the external unit. Basic operations The functions allocat ed to the following opera- tions will differ depending on the connected external unit. For details concerning these functions, refer to the owner âÂÂs manual for the connected external unit. Auto Switching to auto or manual. Audio Vide o Switching to video and audio. Changing the screen mode. Refer to Changing the wide scr een mode on page 43. Switching the equalizer cur ves. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 57. T ouch and hold for more than two seconds to turn the auto-equalizer on or off . Refer to Using the auto-equalizer on page 58. Actions will differ depe nding on the connected external unit. F1 F2 F3 F4 F unction 1 to 4 Actions will differ depe nding on the connected external unit. Using the functions allocated to 1 to 6 keys. Actions will differ depe nding on the connected external unit. <QRB3126-A/N>73 En 73 Section 16 Other Functions Other Functions
Connecting the units WARNING ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, no viewing of front seat video should ever occur while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where they are visi- bly distracting to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply, they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. CAUTION ! PIONEER does not recommend that you in- stall or ser vice your display unit yourself . In- stalling or ser vicing the product may expose you to risk of electric shock or other hazards. Refer all installation and ser vicing of your dis- play unit to authorized Pioneer ser vice person- nel. ! Secure all wiring with cable clamps or electri- cal tape. Do not allow any bare wiring to re- main exposed. ! Do not drill a hole into the engine compart- ment to connect the yellow cable of the dis- play unit to the vehicle batter y . Engine vibration may eventually cause the insulation to fail at the point where the wire passes from the passenger compartment into the engine compartment. T ake extra care in securing the wire at this point. ! It is extremely dangerous to allow the micro- phone lead to become wound around the steering column or gearstick. Be sure to in- stall the unit in such a way that it will not ob- struct driving. ! Make sure that cables will not inter fere with moving parts of the vehicle, such as the gear- shift, parking brake or seat sliding mechan- ism. ! Do not shorten any cables. If you do, the pro- tection circuit may fail to work properly. WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWITCH . IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. WARNING ! Use speakers over 50 W (output value) and be- tween 4 W to 8 W (impedance value). Do not use 1 W to 3 W speakers for this unit. ! The black cable is ground. When installing this unit or power amp (sold separately), make sure to connect the ground wire first. Ensure that the ground wire is properly connected to metal parts of the car âÂÂs body. The ground wire of the power amp and the one of this unit or any other device must be connected to the car separately with different screws. If the screw for the ground wire loosens or falls out, it could result in fire, generation of smoke or malfunction. Ground wir e Metal parts of carâ s body POWER AMP Other devices (Another electronic device in the car) <QRB3126-A/N>74 En 74 Section 17 Installation
Important ! This unit cannot be installed in a vehicle with- out ACC (accessor y) position on the ignition switch. O N S T A R T O F F ACC position No ACC position ! Use this unit with a 12-volt batter y and nega- tive grounding only . F ailure to do so may result in a fire or malfunction. ! T o prevent a short-circuit, overheating or mal- function, be sure to follow the directions below . â Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before installation. â Secure the wiring with cable clamps or ad- hesive tape. Wrap adhesive tape around wiring that comes into contact with metal parts to protect the wiring. â Place all cables away from moving parts, such as the gear shift and seat rails. â Place all cables away from hot places, such as near the heater outlet. â Do not connect the yellow cable to the bat- tery by passing it through the hole to the engine compartment. â Cover any disconnected cable connectors with insulating tape. â Do not shorten any cables. â Never cut the insulation of the power cable of this unit in order to share the power with other devices. The current capacity of the cable is limited. â Use a fuse of the rating prescribed. â Never wire the negative speaker cable di- rectly to ground. â Never band together negative cables of multiple speakers. ! When this unit is on, control signals are sent through the blue/white cable. Connect this cable to the system remote control of an exter- nal power amp or the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). If the vehicle is equipped with a glass anten- na, connect it to the antenna booster power supply terminal. ! Never connect the blue/white cable to the power terminal of an external power amp. Also, never connect it to the power terminal of the auto antenna. Doing so may result in bat- tery drain or a malfunction. ! IP -BUS connectors are color-coded. Be sure to connect connectors of the same color . <QRB3126-A/N>75 En 75 Section 17 Installation Installation
Connecting the power cord ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª Y ellow Connect to the constant 12 V supply terminal. F use resistor Red Connect to terminal controlled by ignition switch (12 V DC). Black (chassis ground) Connect to a clean, paint-free metal location. Left Right F ront speaker F ront speaker Rear speaker or Subwoofer (4 é) White Gray Gray/black White/black Green Violet Green/black Violet/black Violet Violet/black Not used. Green Green/black When using a subwoofer of 70 W (2 é), be sure to connect with Violet and Violet/black leads of this unit. Do not connect anything to Green and Green/black leads. Subwoofer (4 é ) à2 Rear speaker or Subwoofer (4 é) F use (10 A) Orange/white Connect to lighting switch terminal. F use resistor Microphone input (AVH-P3300BT only) This product (AVH-P4300DVD only) Antenna input AUX jack (3.5 ø) (A VH-P4300DVD only) Use a mini plug cable to connect with auxiliary device. RGB input Navigation unit can be connected (AVIC-U220(sold separately)). Please contact your dealer to inquire about the connectable navigation unit. Insert the 26 pin cable in the direction indicated in the figure. 26 pin cable (Supplied with Navigation unit) <QRB3126-A/N>76 En 76 Section 17 Installation
Connection method 1. Clamp the lead. 2. Clamp firmly with needle-nosed pliers. Note: ÷ The position of the parking brake switch depends on the vehicle model. F or details, consult the vehicle Owner âÂÂs Manual or dealer . Y ellow/black If you use an equipment with Mute function, wire this lead to the Audio Mute lead on that equipment. If not, keep the Audio Mute lead free of any connections. Light green Used to detect the ON/OFF status of the parking brake. This lead must be connected to the power supply side of the parking brake switch. Blue/white Connect to system control terminal of the power amp or auto-antenna relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). Ground side P ower supply side P arking brake switch F use resistor With a 2 speaker system, do not connect anything to the speaker leads that are not connected to speakers. Note: ÷ Change the initial setting of this unit. The subwoofer output of this unit is monaural. Violet/white Of the two lead wires connected to the back lamp, connect the one in which the voltage changes when the gear shift is in the REVERSE (R) position. This connection enables the unit to sense whether the car is moving forwards or backwards. Microphone (AVH-P3300BT only) 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.) Wired remote input Hard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). <QRB3126-A/N>77 En 77 Section 17 Installation Installation
When connecting to separately sold power amp ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª ï« ïª Connect with RCA cables (sold separately) Rear speaker Perform these connections when using the optional amplifier . System remote control F ront speaker F ront speaker Lef t Right Rear speaker P ower amp (sold separately) P ower amp (sold separately) P ower amp (sold separately) Subwoofer Subwoofer T o front output T o rear output T o subwoofer output Blue/white Connect to system control terminal of the power amp or auto-antenna relay control terminal. (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). This product Rear output F ront output Subwoofer output (AVH- P4300DVD only) <QRB3126-A/N>78 En 78 Section 17 Installation
Connecting the system (for A VH-P4300DVD model) Bluetooth adapte r (e.g. CD-BTB200) (sold separately) 1.5 m (4 ft. 11 in.) USB cable (Supplied with this unit) Connect to separately sold USB device. IP -BUS cable (Supplied with Bluetooth adapter) Black Microphone for hands-free phoning (supplied with Bluetooth adapter) This product IP -BUS input Wired remote input Hard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). Connecting the system (for A VH-P3300BT model) HD Radio tuner (sold separately) T his product Wired remote input Hard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). IP -BUS cable (Supplied with HD Radio tuner) IP -BUS input <QRB3126-A/N>79 En 79 Section 17 Installation Installation
When connecting with optional CD-IU200V cable (A VH-P4300DVD only) This product Wired remote input H ard-wired remote control adaptor can be connected (sold separately). Dock connector Interface cable (CD-IU200V) (sold separately) iP od with video capabilities (sold separately) IP -BUS cable (Supplied with Bluetooth adapter) Black Bluetooth adapte r (e.g. CD-BTB200) (sold separately) Microphone for hands-free phoning (supplied with Bluetooth adapter) IP -BUS input USB input AUX input ( AUX ) USB cable (Supplied with this unit) 1.5 m (4 ft. 11 in.) <QRB3126-A/N>80 En 80 Section 17 Installation
When connecting the external video component and the display (AVH-P4300DVD only) External video component (sold separately) Audio inputs ( L IN, R IN) Display with RCA input jacks (sold separately) T o video input T o video output T o audio outputs T o audio inputs T his product Mini pin plug cable (sold separately) RCA cables (sold separately) Rear audio output ( REAR AUDIO OUT) Rear monitor output ( V OUT ) Video input ( V IN) ! It is necessar y to change AV Input in System Menu when connecting the exter- nal video component. When using a display connected to rear video output This product âÂÂs rear video output and rear audio output are for connection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD, etc. WARNING ! Never install the display in a location where it is visible to the driver while driving. <QRB3126-A/N>81 En 81 Section 17 Installation Installation
When connecting with a rear view camera When this product is used with a rear view camera, it is possible to automatically switch from the video to rear view image when the gear shift is moved to REVERSE (R). WARNING USE INPUT ONL Y FOR REVERSE OR MIR- ROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MA Y RESUL T IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION ! The screen image may appear reversed. ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur- poses. ! Objects in the rear view may appear closer or more distant than they actually are. T o video output Rear view camera (sold separately) Rear view camera input ( R.C IN) Violet/white Of the two lead wires connected to the back lamp, connect the one in which the voltage changes when the gear shift is in the REVERSE (R) position. This connection enables the unit to sense whether the car is moving forwards or backwards. F use resistor This product RCA cable (sold separately) (AVH-P4300DVD only) CAUTION Y ou must use a camera which outputs mirror reversed images. It is necessar y to set Camera Polarity properly in System Menu when connecting the rear view camera. <QRB3126-A/N>82 En 82 Section 17 Installation
Installation Notes ! Check all connections and systems before final installation. ! Do not use unauthorized parts as this may cause malfunctions. ! Consult your dealer if installation requires dril- ling of holes or other modifications to the vehi- cle. ! Do not install this unit where: â it may inter fere with operation of the vehi- cle. â it may cause injury to a passenger as a re- sult of a sudden stop. ! Do not install the display where it may (i) ob- struct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the per for- mance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs operating systems or safety features, including air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely operate the vehicle. ! The semiconductor laser will be damaged if it overheats. Install this unit away from hot places such as near the heater outlet. ! Optimum performance is obtained when the unit is installed at an angle of less than 30ð. ! T o ensure proper heat dispersal when using this unit, make sure you leave ample space behind the rear panel and wrap any loose cables so they are not blocking the vents when installing the unit. 5 cm cm Leave ample space 5 cm 5 cm ! T o some types of vehicles, this unit cannot be properly installed. In such case, use the op- tional installation kit (ADT - VA133). Installation using the screw holes on the side of the unit % Fastening the unit to the factory radio- mounting bracket. P osition the unit so that its screw holes are aligned with the screw holes of the bracket, and tighten the screws at 3 or 4 locations on each side. <QRB3126-A/N>83 En 83 Section 17 Installation Installation
1 2 3 5 4 1 If the pawl gets in the way, bend it down. 2 Factory radio mounting bracket 3 Use either truss (5 mm ÃÂ 8 mm) or flush sur face (5 mm ÃÂ 9 mm) screws, depending on the bracket screw holes. 4 Frame In some types of vehicles, discrepancy may occur between the unit and the dashboard. If this happens, use the supplied frame to fill the gap. 5 Dashboard or console Installing the microphone (A VH-P3300BT only) CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to allow the micro- phone lead to become wound around the steer- ing column or gearstick. Be sure to install the unit in such a way that it will not obstruct driving. Note Install the microphone in a position and orienta- tion that will enable it to pick up the voice of the person operating the system. When installing the microphone on the sun visor 1 Install the microphone on the micro- phone clip. 1 2 1 Microphone 2 Microphone clip 2 Install the microphone clip on the sun visor . With the sun visor up, install the microphone clip. (Lowering the sun visor reduces the voice recognition rate.) <QRB3126-A/N>84 En 84 Section 17 Installation
1 2 1 Microphone clip 2 Clamp Use separately sold clamps to secure the lead where necessar y inside the vehicle. When installing the microphone on the steering column 1 Install the microphone on the micro- phone clip. 2 1 3 4 1 Microphone 2 Microphone base 3 Microphone clip 4 Fit the microphone lead into the groove. # Microphone can be installed without using microphone clip. In this case, detach the micro- phone base from the microphone clip. T o detach the microphone base from the microphone clip, slide the microphone base. 2 Install the microphone clip on the rear side of the steering column. 1 2 1 Double-sided tape 2 Clamp Use separately sold clamps to secure the lead where necessar y inside the vehicle. Adjusting the microphone angle The microphone angle can be adjusted. <QRB3126-A/N>85 En 85 Section 17 Installation Installation
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) The power will not turn on. The unit will not operate. Leads and con- nectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connec- tions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the cause and then replace the fuse. Be sure to install a fuse with the same rating. Noise and/or other factors are causing the built- in microproces- sor to operate in- correctly. Press RESET .( P a g e 11) Operation with the remote control is not possible. The unit does not operate correctly even when the ap- propriate re- mote control buttons are pressed. Batter y power is low . Load a new batter y. Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. T r y operating with another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. The type of disc loaded cannot be played on this unit. Check the disc type. The disc loaded is not compatible with this video system. Change the disc to one that is compa- tible with your video system. There is no sound. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected cor- rectly . Connect the cables correctly. The unit is per- forming still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame- by-frame playback . Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) There is no image dis- played. The parking brake cable is not connected. Connect the park- ing brake cable, and apply the park- ing brake. The parking brake is not ap- plied. Connect the park- ing brake cable, and apply the park- ing brake. The icon is displayed, and operation is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the config- uration of the disc. This operation is not possible. The image dis- played stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. The data could no longer be read during play- back. Stop playback once, and start playback again. There is no sound. The volume level is low. The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . The sound and video skip. The unit is not firmly secured. Firmly secure the unit. File size and transmission rate are above recom- mended rates. Create a DivX file that is within the recommended size and transmission rate. The aspect ratio is incor- rect and the image is stretched. The aspect ratio setting is incor- rect for the dis- play . Select the appro- priate setting for your display. (P age 61) The motor sounds when the ignition switch is turned ON (or is turned to ACC). The unit is con- firming whether or not a disc is loaded. This is a normal operation. <QRB3126-A/N>86 En 86 Appendix Additional Information
Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) Nothing is dis- played. The touch panel keys can- not be used. The rear view camera is not connected. Connect a rear view camera. Camera Polarity is at incor rect setting. Press and hold MENU to return to the source display and then select the correct setting for Camera Polarity . (P age 66) No xxxx ap- pears when a display is chan- ged ( No Title, for example). There is no em- bedded text infor- mation. Switch the display or play another track/file. Sub-folders cannot be played back. Folder repeat play has been se- lected. Select the repeat range again. The repeat range changes automatically. Another folder was selected dur- ing repeat play. Select the repeat range again. T rack search or fast for ward/re- verse was per- formed during file repeat play. Select the repeat range again. DVD Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not possible. P arental lock is activated. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (Page 61) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Enter the correct code number . (P age 61) Y ou have forgot - ten your code number . Press RESET .( P a g e 62) Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) Dialog lan- guage (and subtitle lan- guage) cannot be switched. The DVD being played does not feature multiple language record- ings. The language can- not be switched if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch the lan- guage using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD being played does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch the lan- guage using the disc menu. Playback is not per formed with the audio lan- guage and sub- title language settings se- lected in Video Setup menu. The DVD being played does not feature dialog or subtitles in the selected lan- guage. The language can- not be switched if the selected lan- guage is not re- corded on the disc. The viewing angle cannot be switched. The DVD being played does not feature scenes shot from multi- ple angles. The viewing angle cannot be switched if the DVD does not fea- ture scenes re- corded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multi- angle viewing for a scene that was not recorded from multiple an- gles. Switch between multiple angles when watching scenes recorded from multiple an- gles. <QRB3126-A/N>87 En 87 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Symptom Cause Action (Refer- ence page) The image is extremely un- clear/distorted and dark dur- ing playback. Some discs fea- ture a signal to prohibit copying. Since this unit is compatible with the analog copy generation man- agement system, when playing a disc that has a sig- nal prohibiting copying, horizontal stripes or other im- per fections may appear when viewed on some displays. This is not a malfunction. Video CD Symptom Cause Action The PBC (play- back control) menu cannot be called up. The Video CD being played does not feature PBC. This operation is not available for Video CDs that do not feature PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD being played fea- tures PBC. This operation is not available for Video CDs that fea- ture PBC. iPod Symptom Cause Action The iPod does not operate correctly. The cables are in- correctly con- nected. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. The iPod version is old. Update the iPod version. Bluetooth audio/telephone Symptom Cause Action The sound from the Blue- tooth audio source is not played back. There is a call in progress on a Bluetooth con- nected cellular phone. The sound will be played back when the call is termi- nated. A Bluetooth-con- nected cellular phone is cur- rently being oper- ated. Do not operate the cellular phone at this time. A call was made with a Bluetooth- connected cellu- lar phone and then immediately terminated. As a result, communi- cation between this unit and the cellular phone was not termi- nated properly. Reconnect the Bluetooth connec- tion between this unit and the cellu- lar phone. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to note the error message. T uner Message Cause Action No Data Pro- vided This unit cannot receive artist name/song title information. Move to the desir- able location with good reception. No Data This unit cannot receive program ser vice name in- formation. Move to the desir- able location with good reception. DVD Message Cause Action Different Re- gion Disc The disc does not have the same region number as this unit. Replace the DVD with one bearing the correct region number . <QRB3126-A/N>88 En 88 Appendix Additional Information
Message Cause Action Error -02-XX/ FF-FF The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. The disc is scratched. Replace the disc. The disc is loaded upside down. Check that the disc is loaded correctly. There is an elec- trical or mechan- ical error . Press RESET . Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played on this unit. Replace the disc with one that can be played on this unit. The inserted disc does not contain any playable files. Replace the disc. Protect All the files on the inserted disc are embedded with DRM. Replace the disc. Skipped The inserted disc contains DRM protected files. Play an audio file not embedded with Windows Media DRM 9/10. TEMP The temperature of the unit is out- side the normal operating range. W ait until the unit returns to a tem- perature within the normal operating limits. Rental Ex- pired. The inserted disc contains expired DivX VOD con- tent. Select a file that can be played. Video resolu- tion not sup- ported The inserted disc contains a high definition DivX file. Select a file that can be played. It is not possi- ble to write it in the flash. This unit âÂÂs flash memor y used as the temporar y storage area is full. Select a file that can be played. Y our device is not author- ized to play this DivX pro- tected video. This unit âÂÂs DivX registration code has not been authorized by the DivX VOD con- tents provider . Register this unit to the DivX VOD contents provider . Message Cause Action Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on this unit. Select a file that can be played. Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Video frame rate not sup- ported. DivX file âÂÂs frame rate is more than 30 fps. Select a file that can be played. Audio Format not sup- ported. This type of file is not supported on this unit. Select a file that can be played. External storage device (USB, SD) Message Cause Action Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on this unit. Select a file that can be played. There are no songs. T ransfer the audio files to the USB portable audio player/USB mem- or y and connect. Security for the connected USB memor y is en- abled. Follow the USB memor y instruc- tions to disable se- curity . Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Skipped The connected USB portable audio player/ USB memor y contains WMA files that are pro - tected by Windows Med- ia ä DRM 9/10. Play an audio file not embedded with Windows Media DRM 9/10. <QRB3126-A/N>89 En 89 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Message Cause Action Protect All the files on the connected USB portable audio player/ USB memor y are protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10. T ransfer audio files not protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and con- nect. Incompatible USB The USB device connected to is not supported by this unit. Connect a USB portable audio player or USB memor y that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant. The USB device is not formatted with FA T16 or FA T32. The connected USB device should be formatted with FA T16 or FA T32. Incompatible SD Unsupported SD card is inserted. Use the supported SD card. Non-compatible SD storage de- vice Remove your de- vice and replace it with a compatible SD storage device. Check USB The USB connec- tor or USB cable has short- circuited. Check that the USB connector or USB cable is not caught in some- thing or damaged. The connected USB portable audio player/ USB memor y consumes more than maximum allowable cur- rent. Disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and do not use it. T urn the ignition switch to OFF , then to ACC or ON and then connect a compli- ant USB portable audio player/USB memor y. Message Cause Action Error -02-9X/- DX Communication failed. Perform one of the following opera- tions. â T urn the ignition switch OFF and back ON. â Disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memor y. â Change to a dif- ferent source. Then, return to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y. Rental Ex- pired. The inserted ex- ternal storage de- vice contains expired DivX VOD content. Select a file that can be played. Video resolu- tion not sup- ported The inserted ex- ternal storage de- vice contains a high definition DivX file. Select a file that can be played. It is not possi- ble to write it in the flash. This unit âÂÂs flash memor y used as the temporar y storage area is full. Select a file that can be played. Y our device is not author- ized to play this DivX pro- tected video. This unit âÂÂs DivX registration code has not been authorized by the DivX VOD con- tents provider . Register this unit to the DivX VOD contents provider . Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Video frame rate not sup- ported. DivX file âÂÂs frame rate is more than 30 fps. Select a file that can be played. Audio Format not sup- ported. This type of file is not supported on this unit. Select a file that can be played. <QRB3126-A/N>90 En 90 Appendix Additional Information
iPod Message Cause Action Format Read Sometimes there is a delay be- tween the start of playback and when you start to hear any sound. W ait until the mes- sage disappears and you hear sound. Error -02-6X/- 9X/-DX Communication failed. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. iP od failure. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. Error -02-67 The iPod firm- ware version is old. Update the iPod version. Stop There are no songs. T ransfer songs to the iPod . There are no songs in the cur- rent list. Select a list that contains songs. Not Found No related songs. T ransfer songs to the iPod . iT unes tagging Message Cause Action iPod full. T ags not trans- ferred. Memor y used for tag information on the iPod is full. Sync the iPod with iT unes and clean up the tagged play- list. Memory full. T ags not stored. This unit âÂÂs flash memor y used as the temporar y storage area is full. Connect the iPod to this unit and transfer this unit âÂÂs tag information to the iPod . T ags trans- ferred failed. This unit âÂÂs tag in- formation cannot transfer to the iP od. Check the iPod and tr y again. T ag store failed. T ag information cannot be stored in this unit. T r y again. Message Cause Action Error -8D Built-in FLASH ROM encoun- tered an error T urn the ignition OFF and ON. SD source can- not be se- lected during tag transfer . T ag information is being trans- ferred to the iP od. W ait until tag transfer is com- plete. Bluetooth Message Cause Action Error -10 The power failed for the Bluetooth module of this unit. T urn the ignition switch OFF and then to ACC or ON. If the error mes- sage is still dis- played after per forming the above action, please contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Station. Pandora Message Cause Action Error -19 Communication failed. Disconnect the cable from the iP od. Once the iP od âÂÂs main menu is displayed, recon- nect the iPod and reset it. Start up the Pandora Ap- plication from your Device. The Pandora ap- plication has not started runnin g yet. Start up the P andora applica- tion from your iP od/iPhone. Unable to save thumb rating. T ry again later . Unable to save thumb rating. T r y again later . Unable to save Book- mark. T ry again later . Unable to save BookMark. T r y again later . Pandora sys- tem mainte- nance. T ry again later . P andora system is undergoing maintenance. T r y again later . Skip limit reached. Skip limit reached. Do not exceed the skip limit. <QRB3126-A/N>91 En 91 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Message Cause Action This version of the Pandora Ap- plication is not sup- ported. This version of the Pandora ap- plication is not supported. Connect an iPod/ iPhone that has a compatible version of the P andora ap- plication installed. Check Device Device error mes- sage displayed in P andora Applica- tion. Please check your iP od/iPhone. Pandora is un- able to play music. Please see your De- vice. Unable to play music from P andora. Please check your iP od/iPhone. Create station within the Pandora Ap- plication on Device. No station found. Create a station in the Pandora appli- cation on your iP od/iPhone. No Active Sta- tion No station se- lected. Select a station. Understanding auto EQ error messages When correct measurement of the car âÂÂs inter- ior acoustic characteristics is not possible using auto EQ, an error message may appear on the display. In such cases, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and how it may be corrected. After checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error . Please check MIC. The microphone is not connected. Plug the optional microphone se- curely into the jack. Message Cause Action Error . Please check xxxx speaker . The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are con- nected correctly. ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp con- nected to the speakers. ! Plug the micro - phone securely into the jack. Error . Please check noise. The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is quiet, and switch off the engine, air conditioner and heater . ! Set the micro - phone correctly. Error . Please check battery . P ower is not being supplied from the batter y to this unit. ! Connect the bat- tery correctly. ! Check the batter y voltage. Understanding messages Messages T ranslation Screen image may ap- pear reversed. Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror- reversed images. Otherwise, the screen image will appear re- versed. <QRB3126-A/N>92 En 92 Appendix Additional Information
Indicator list Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 1 Indicates that the selecte d fre- quency is being broadcast in stereo. Indicates that a Bluetoo th tele- phone is connected. Indicates that the digital format is Dolby Digital. Indicates that the digital format is MPEG Audio. Indicates that the digital format is Linear PCM. Indicates the sampling frequency. Indicates that the digital format is DTS. 1 1ch 2 ch Mch Indicates the audio channel. Indicates that a disc with PBC On is being played. ! Indicates that a cellular phone is connected. ! Indicates that an incoming call has been received and has not been checked yet. ! Not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. Indicates the batter y strength of the cellular phone. ! The level shown on the indica- tor may differ from the ac tual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displ ayed in the batter y strength indi ca- tor area. Indicates the signal streng th of the cellular phone. Indicates that Auto EQ is on. Shows when HD Radio signal is re- ceived. Shows when analog audio of HD Radio signal is received. Shows when digital audio of HD Radio signal is received. Shows when HD Radio station in- formation is received. Shows when downloadable song information (tag) from a radio sta- tion is received. Shows when song information (tag) from an HD Radio station is being saved to this unit. Shows while searching a song/ video in alphabet search mode. Shows when song information (tag) is being saved to your iPod . Shows when this unit has the song information (tag). Shows which audio language has been selected. <QRB3126-A/N>93 En 93 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Shows which subtitle language has been selected. Shows which viewing angle has been selected. Shows which audio output has been selected. Area 2 Shows the disc title of the CD text disc currently being played. Shows the song title when receiving the tag information. Shows the track title of the track cur- rently being played for CD text discs. Shows the song title of the song cur- rently being played for MP3/WMA/ AAC files. Shows the comment currently being played. Shows the station nam e currently tuned in to. Shows the artist name when receiv- ing the tag information. Shows the artist name of the track/ song currently being playe d for CD text discs. Shows the artist name of the artist currently being played for MP3/ WMA/AAC files. Shows cellular phone information. Shows genera l phone information. Shows home phone information. Shows office phone information. Shows other phone information. Shows the categor y name. Shows the folder nam e of the folder containing the MP3/WMA/AAC file currently being played. Shows the file nam e of the MP3/ WMA/AAC file currently being played. Shows the preset number of the sta- tion currently being tuned in to. CH Shows the channel curr ently being tuned in to. Shows SIRIUS information. Area 3 Shows the title number currently being played. Shows the chapter number cur- rently being played. Shows the replay time currently being played. Shows when the game alert func- tion is on while receiving SIRIUS stations. Shows the genre of the track/song currently being played. Indicates that the feature demo is on. <QRB3126-A/N>94 En 94 Appendix Additional Information
Handling guidelines Discs and player Use only discs featuring any of following logos. Use 12-cm discs. Do not use 8-cm discs or an adapter for 8-cm discs. Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/-RW) or CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or other wise damaged discs as they may damage the player . Unfinalized CD -R/CD-RW discs cannot be played back. Do not touch the recorded sur face of the discs. Store discs in their cases when not in use. Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemica ls to the sur face of the discs. T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a sof t cloth out- ward from the center . Condensation may temporarily impair the player âÂÂs per forma nce. Let it rest for about one hour to adjust to a warmer temperature. Also, wi pe any damp discs off with a sof t cloth. Playback of discs may not be possible because of disc characteristics, disc format, recorded applica- tion, playback environment, storage conditions, and so on. Road shocks may interrupt disc playback . Read the precautions for discs before using them. Certain funct ions may not be available for some DVD video discs. It may not be possible to play ba ck some DVD video discs. It is not possible to play back DVD -RAM discs. This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) for- mat. Do not insert AVCHD discs as you may not be able to eject the disc. External storage device (USB, SD) Depending on the exte rnal storage device (USB, SD), the following problems may occur . ! Operations may var y . ! The storage dev ice may not be recognize d. ! Files may not be played back properly. USB storage device Connections via USB hu b are not supported. Do not connect anything other than a USB storage device. Firmly secure the USB storage device when driving. Do not let the USB storage device fall onto the floor , where it may becom e jammed under the brake or ac- celerator pedal. Depending on the USB storage device, the device may cause noise to occur in the radio. Copyright protected files that are stored in the USB devices cann ot be playe d back. Y ou cannot connect a USB portable audio player/USB memor y to this unit via USB hub. P artitioned USB memor y is not compatible with this unit. Depending on the kind of USB portable audio playe r/ USB memor y you use, the device may not be recog- nized or audio files may not be played back properly. Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memor y in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. Doing so may cause the device to malfunction from the extreme rise in temp erature. <QRB3126-A/N>95 En 95 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
SD memory card This unit supports only the following types of SD memor y cards. ! SD ! SDHC Keep the SD memor y card out of the reach of chil- dren. Should the SD memor y card be swallowed, con- sult a doctor immediately. Do not touch the connectors of the SD memor y card directly with your fingers or with any metal device. Do not insert anything other than an SD memor y card into the SD card slot. If a metal object (such as a coin) is inserted into the slot, the internal circuits may break and cause malfun ctions. Do not insert a damaged SD memor y card (e.g. warped, label peeled off) as it may not be ejected from the slot. Do not tr y to force an SD memor y card into the SD card slot as the card or this unit may be damaged. When ejecting an SD memor y card, press it and hold it until it clicks. It is dangerous for you to release your finger immediately after you press on the card as the card may shoot out of the slot and hit you in the face, etc. If the card shoots out of the slot, it may become lost. iPod T o ensure proper operation, connect the dock connec- tor cable from the iPod directly to this unit. Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not let the iP od fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. About iPod settings ! When an iPod is conne cted, this unit changes the EQ (equalizer) setting of the iPod to off in order to optimize the acoustics. When you disconnect the iP od, the EQ returns to the original setting. ! Y ou cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod when using this unit. Repeat is automatical ly changed to All when the iPod is connected to this unit. Incompatible text saved on the iP od will not be dis- played by the unit. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs Unfinalized DVD -R/-RW discs which have been re- corded in the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back. Playback of DVD-R/DVD-RW discs may not be possi- ble, due to disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. Depending on the ap plication settings and the en vir- onment, playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, playback is possi- ble only for discs which have been finalized. Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer may not be pos- sible due to disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. Depending on the ap plication settings and the en vir- onment, playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossi- ble in case of direct exposu re to sunlight, high tem- peratures, or the storage conditions in the vehicle. Titles and other text information reco rded on a CD-R/ CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit (in the case of audio da ta (CD-DA)). DualDiscs DualDiscs are two-side d discs that have a recordabl e CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of DualDiscs is not physi- cally compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. F requent loading and ejecting of a DualDisc may re- sult in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback proble ms on this unit. In some cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in the disc load- ing slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recom- mend you refrain from using DualDisc wi th this unit. Please refer to the information from the disc manu- facturer for more detailed information about DualDiscs. <QRB3126-A/N>96 En 96 Appendix Additional Information
JPEG picture files JPEG is short for Joint Photograph ic Experts Group and refers to a still image compression technology standard. Files are compatible with Baseline JPE G and EXIF 2.1 still images up to a resolution of 8 192 à7 680. (EXIF format is used most commonly with digital still cam- eras.) Playback of EXIF format files that were processed by a personal computer may not be possible. There is no progres sive JPEG compatibility. DivX video files Depending on the compo sition of the file information, such as the number of audio streams or file size, there may be a slight delay when playing back discs. Some special operations may be prohibited due to the composition of the DivX files. Only DivX files down loaded from a DivX partn er site are guarantee for proper operation. Unauthorized DivX files may not operate properly . DRM rental files cannot be operated until playback is started. Recommended file size: 2 Mbps or less with a tran s- mission rate of 2 GB or less. The ID code of this unit must be registe red to a DivX VOD provider in order to playback DivX VOD file s. For information on ID codes, refer to Displayin g the DivX â VOD r egistration code on page 63. For more details ab out DivX, visit the following site: http://www .divx.com/ Important ! When naming a JPEG image file, add the cor- responding filename extension (.jpg, .jpeg, . jpe or .jfif). ! This unit plays back files with these filename extensions (.jpg, .jpeg, .jpe or .jfif) as a JPEG image file. T o prevent malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than JPEG image files. Compressed audio compatibility (disc, USB, SD) WMA File extension: .wma Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 48 kHz Windows Media Audio Professional, Lossles s, Voice/ DRM Stream/Stream with video: Not compatible MP3 File extension: .mp3 Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for emphasis) Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority over Version 1.x.) M3u playlist: Not compat ible MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: Not compat ible AAC Compatible forma t: AAC encoded by iT unes File extension: .m4a Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps Apple Lossless: Not compatible AAC file bought from the iT unes Store (.m4p file ex- tension): Not compatible DivX compatibility Compatible forma t: DivX video format implement ed in relation to DivX sta ndards File extensions: .avi or .divx DivX Ultra format: Not compatible DivX HD format: Not compatible DivX files without video data: Not compatible DivX plus: Not compatible Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital <QRB3126-A/N>97 En 97 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
LPCM: Not compatible Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR Sampling frequenc y : 8 kHz to 48 kHz Compatible externa l subtitle file extension: .srt Supplemental information Some characters in a file nam e (including the file ex- tension) or a folder name may not be displayed. This unit may not operate correctly dependi ng on the application used to encode WMA files. There may be a slight delay at the start of playback of audio files embedded with image data or audio files stored on an external storage device (USB/S D) that has numerous folder hierarchies. Disc Playable folders: up to 700 Playable files: up to 999 for CD-R/CD -RW Playable files: up to 3 500 for DVD-R/DVD -RW File system: ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF 1.02 (DVD-R/DVD -RW) Multi-session playback: Compatible P acket write data transfer: Not compatible Regardless of the length of blank sections between the songs from the original recording, compres sed audio discs play with a short pause between songs. External storage device (USB, SD) Playable folders: up to 6 000 Playable files: up to 65 535, up to 255 for one folder Playback of copyright-protected files: Not compatible P artitioned external storage device (USB, SD): Only the first playable partition can be played. There is no compatibil ity for Multi Media Cards (MMC). Compatibility with all SD memor y cards is not guaran- teed. This unit is not compatible with SD-Audio/S D- Video. CAUTION ! P ioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the USB memor y/USB portable audio player/SD memory card even if that data is lost while using this unit. ! Do not leave the discs/external storage device (USB, SD) or iP od in places with high temperatures. iPod compatibility This unit supports only the following iPod models. Supported iPod software versions are shown below . Older versions may not be supp orted. ! iPhone 4 (sof tware version 4.1) ! iPhone 3GS (sof tware version 4.1) ! iPhone 3G (sof tware version 4.1) ! iPhone (software version 3.1.3) ! iP od nano 5th generation (software version 1.0.2) ! iP od nano 4th generation (software version 1.0.4) ! iP od nano 3rd generation (software version 1.1.3) ! iP od nano 2nd generation (software version 1.1.3) ! iP od nano 1st generation (software version 1.3.1) ! iP od touch 3rd generation (software version 4.0) ! iP od touch 2nd generation (software version 4.0) ! iP od touch 1st generation (software version 3.1.3) ! iP od classic 160GB (soft ware version 2.0.4) ! iP od classic 120GB (soft ware version 2.0.1) ! iP od classic (software version 1.1.2) ! iP od 5th gen eration (software version 1.3) Depending on the gen eration or version of the iPod , some functions may not be available. Operations may var y depending on the software ver- sion of iP od. When using an iPod , an iP od Dock Conn ector to USB Cable is required. When you use Pioneer CD-IU50V/CD -IU200V inter face cable, consult your dealer for details. About the file/format compatibility, refer to the iPod manuals. Audio Book, Podcast: Compatible CAUTION P ioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the iPod , even if that data is lost while this unit is used. <QRB3126-A/N>98 En 98 Appendix Additional Information
Sequence of audio files The user cannot assign folder numbers and specify playback sequences with this unit. Example of a hierarchy î î î î î î Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 01 02 03 04 05 : Folder : Compressed audio file 01 to 05: Folder number 1 to 6 : Playback sequence Disc F older selection sequence or other operation may differ depending on the encoding or writ- ing software. External storage device (USB, SD) The playback sequence is the same as the re- corded sequence in the external storage de- vice (USB, SD). T o specify the playback sequence , the follow- ing method is recommended. 1 Create a file name that includes numbers that specify the playback sequence (e.g., 001xxx. mp3 and 099yyy.mp3). 2 Put those files into a folder . 3 Save the folder that contains the files to the external storage device (USB, SD). However , depending on the system environ- ment, you may not be able to specify the play- back sequence . F or USB portable audio players, the sequence is different and depends on the player . Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal inspec- tion, adjustments, or repairs. Handling the display ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch ea- sily . ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come very hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. Y ou should avoid exposing the display unit to direct sunlight as much as possible. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature range of âÂÂ10ðC to 60ðC (14 ðF to 140 ðF). At temperatures higher or lower than this operating temperature range, the display may not operate normally. ! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in- crease its visibility within the vehicle. Do not press it strongly on it as this may da- mage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as this may scratch it. <QRB3126-A/N>99 En 99 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cooler may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a malfunction. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna away from the display to prevent dis- ruption of the video image by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. LED (light-emitting diode) backlight ! At low temperatures, using the LED back- light may increase image lag and degrade the image quality due to the characteristics of the LCD screen. Image quality will im- prove with an increase in temperature. ! T o protect the LED backlight, the display will darken in the following environments: â In the direct sunlight â Near the heater vent ! The product lifetime of the LED backlight is more than 10 000 hours. However , it may decrease if used in high temperatures. ! If the LED backlight reaches the end of its product lifetime, the screen will become dark and the image will no longer be pro- jected. In such cases, please consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display, first turn the system power off, then wipe with a soft dr y cloth. ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Copyright an d trademark This item incorporates copy protection tech- nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disas- sembly are prohibited. Bluetooth The Bluetooth â word mark and logos are regis- tered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other trade- marks and trade names are those of their re- spective owners. ! Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio connectivity technology that is developed as a cable replacement for mobile phones, handheld PCs and other devices. Bluetooth operates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per second. Bluetooth was launched by a special interest group (SIG) that comprises of Ericsson Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., T oshiba and IBM in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly 2 000 companies worldwide. DVD video is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. iT unes Apple and iT unes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. <QRB3126-A/N>100 En 100 Appendix Additional Information
MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad- casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic con- tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An indepen- dent license for such use is required. For de- tails, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA Windows Media is either a registered trade- mark or trademark of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. SD memory card SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. iPod & iPhone iPhone , iPod , iPod classic, iP od nano, and iP od touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries. â Made for iPodâ and â Made for iPhone â mean that an electronic accessor y has been de- signed to connect specifically to iP od or iPhone , respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per formance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulator y standards. Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolby â and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DivX DivX â is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO : DivX â is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an of- ficial DivX Certified â device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND : This DivX Certified â device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-De- mand (VOD) movies. T o obtain your registra- tion code, locate the DivX VOD section in Menu operations . Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registra- tion. About the SA T RADIO READY mark The SA T RADIO READY mark indicates that the Satellite Radio T uner for Pioneer (i.e., XM tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately) can be controlled by this unit. Please inquire to your dealer or nearest authorized P ioneer ser vice station regarding the satellite radio tuner that can be connected to this unit. For satellite radio tuner operation, please refer to the satellite radio tuner owner âÂÂs manual. ! The system will use direct satellite-to-recei- ver broadcasting technology to provide lis- teners in their cars and at home with cr ystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satellite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital-quality music, news, sports, talk and children âÂÂs programming. ! â SA T Radio âÂÂ, the SA T Radio logo and all re- lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satel- lite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc. <QRB3126-A/N>101 En 101 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
HD Radio ä T echnology ! This HD Radio Ready receiver is ready to re- ceive HD Radio broadcasts when con- nected to the HD Radio tuner (e.g. GEX- P20HD), sold separately. HD Radio ä, HD Radio Ready ä, and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietar y trade- marks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. Pandora P andora is a registered trademark of P andora Media, Inc. <QRB3126-A/N>102 En 102 Appendix Additional Information
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Dzongkha (dz), 0426 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kinyarwanda (r w), 1823 English (en), 0514 Ewe (ee), 0505 Komi (kv), 1122 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 F rench (fr), 0618 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Cornish (kw), 1123 Sardinian (sc), 1903 Spanish (es), 0519 Estonian (et), 0520 Kirghiz, Kyrgyz (ky), 1125 Sindhi (sd), 1904 German (de), 0405 Basque (eu), 0521 Latin (la), 1201 Northern Sami (se), 1905 Italian (it), 0920 P ersian (fa), 0601 Luxembourgish (lb), 1202 Sangho (sg), 1907 Chinese (zh), 2608 Fulah (ff), 0606 Ganda (lg), 1207 Sinhala (si), 1909 Dutch, Flemish (nl), 1412 Finnish (fi), 0609 Limburgan (li), 1209 Slovak (sk), 1911 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Fijian (fj), 0610 Lingala (ln), 1214 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Swedish (sv), 1922 Faroese (fo), 0615 Lao (lo), 1215 Samoan (sm), 1913 Russian (ru), 1821 W estern Frisian (fy), 0625 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Shona (sn), 1914 Korean (ko), 1115 Irish (ga), 0701 Luba-Katanga (lu), 1221 Somali (so), 1915 Greek (el), 0512 Gaelic (gd), 0704 Latvian (lv), 1222 Albanian (sq), 1917 Afar (aa), 0101 Galician (gl), 0712 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Serbian (sr), 1918 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Guarani (gn), 0714 Marshallese (mh), 1308 Swati (ss), 1919 Avestan (ae), 0105 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Maori (mi), 1309 Sotho, Southern (st), 1920 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Manx (gv), 0722 Macedo nian (mk), 1311 Sundanese (su), 1921 Akan (ak), 0111 Hausa (ha), 0801 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Swahili (sw), 1923 Amharic (am), 0113 Hebrew (he), 0805 Mongolian (mn), 1 314 T amil (ta), 2001 Aragonese (an) , 0114 Hin di (hi), 0809 Marathi (mr), 1318 T elugu (te) , 2005 Arabic (ar), 0118 Hiri Motu (ho ), 0815 Malay (ms), 1319 T ajik (tg), 2007 Assamese (as), 0119 Croatian (hr), 0818 Maltese (mt), 1320 Thai (th) , 2008 Avaric (av), 0122 Haitian (ht), 0820 Burmese (my), 1325 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Aymara (ay), 0125 Hungar ian (hu), 0821 Nauru (na), 1401 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Armenian (hy), 0825 Bokmal (nb), 1402 T agalog (tl), 2012 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Herero (hz), 0826 Ndebele, North (nd), 1404 T swana (tn), 2014 Belarusian (be), 0205 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Nepali (ne), 1405 T onga (to), 2015 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Indone sian (id), 0904 Ndonga (ng), 1407 T urkish (tr), 2018 Bihari (bh), 0208 Interli ngue (ie), 0905 Nynorsk (nn), 1414 T songa (ts), 2019 Bislama (bi), 0209 Igbo (ig), 0907 Norwegian (no), 1415 T atar (tt), 2020 Bambara (bm), 0213 Sichuan Yi (ii), 0909 Ndebele, South (nr), 1418 T wi (tw), 2023 Bengali (bn), 0214 Inupiaq (ik), 0911 Navajo, Navaho (nv), 1422 T ahitian (ty), 2025 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Ido (io), 0915 Chichewa (ny), 1425 Uighur , Uyghur (ug), 2107 Breton (br), 0218 Icelandic (is), 0919 Occitan (oc), 1503 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Bosnian (bs), 0219 Inuktitut (iu), 0921 Ojibw a (oj), 1510 Urdu (ur), 2118 Catalan (ca), 0301 Javanese (jv), 1022 Oromo (om), 1513 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Chechen (ce), 0305 Geor gian (ka), 1101 Oriya (or), 1518 Venda (ve), 2205 Chamorro (c h), 0308 Kongo (kg), 1107 Ossetian (os), 1519 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Corsican (co), 0315 Kiku yu, Gikuyu (ki), 1109 P anjabi, Punjabi (pa), 1601 V olapük (vo), 2215 Cree (cr), 0318 Kuanyama (kj), 1110 Pali (pi), 1609 Walloon (wa), 2301 Czech (cs), 0319 Kazakh (kk), 1111 P olish (pl), 1612 W olof (wo), 2315 Church Slavic (cu), 0321 Kalaallisut (kl), 1112 Pashto, P ushto (ps), 1619 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Chuvash (cv), 0322 Central Khmer (km), 1113 Quechua (qu), 1721 Yiddish (yi), 2509 W elsh (cy), 0325 Kanna da (kn), 1114 Romansh (rm), 1813 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Danish (da), 0401 Kanuri (kr), 1118 Rundi (rn), 1814 Zhuang, Chuan g (za), 2601 Divehi (dv), 0422 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Romanian (ro), 1815 Zulu (zu), 2621 <QRB3126-A/N>103 En 103 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
Specifications General P ower source ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ................... Negative type Maximum current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): D Chassis ..................... 178 mm à100 mm à165 mm (7 in. à3-7/8 in. à6-1/2 in.) Nose ........................... 171 mm à97 mm à18 mm (6-3/4 in.à3-7/8 in.à3/4 in.) (AVH-P4300DVD) Nose ........................... 171 mm à97 mm à7 mm (6-3/4 in. à3-7/8 in. à1/4 in.) (AVH-P3300BT) W eight .......................................... 2.2 kg (4.84 lbs) (AVH-P4300DVD) W eight .......................................... 1.8 kg (4.0 lbs) (AVH-P3300BT) Display Screen size/asp ect ratio ....... 6.95 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 156.4 à81.7 mm) (AVH-P4300DVD) Screen size/asp ect ratio ....... 5.8 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 128.4 à70.9 mm) (AVH-P3300BT) Pixels ............................................. 345 600 (1 440 à240) Display method ........................ TFT active matrix, driving type Color system .............................. NTSC Durable temperature range (power off) ..................................................... â 20 ðC to 80 ðC Audio Maximum power output ....... 50 W à4 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoo- fer) Continuous powe r output ... 22 W à4 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5 % THD, 4 W load, both channe ls dri- ven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W (2 W for 1 ch) allowable) Preout maximum output level ..................................................... 4.0 V Equalizer (8-Band Graphic Equalizer): F requency .......................... 40/80/200 /400/1k/2.5k/8k/ 10 kHz Gain ...................................... ñ12 dB HPF : F requency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/ 125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): F requency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/ 125 Hz Slope .................................... âÂÂ18 dB/oct Gain ...................................... 6 dB to âÂÂ24 dB Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse Bass boost: Gain ...................................... 12 dB to 0 dB DVD Player System .......................................... DVD video, Video CD, CD, WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX , JPEG system Usable discs .............................. DVD video, Video CD, CD, CD-R/RW , DVD-R/RW/R DL Region number ........................ 1 F requency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net- work) (RCA level) Output level: Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver . 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT un es en- coded only) (.m4a) (V er . 8.2 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2, 6 (.avi, .div x) USB USB standard specification ..................................................... USB 1.1, USB 2.0 full speed Maximum current supply .... 500 mA USB Class ................................... MSC (Mass Storage Class) File system .................................. FA T16, FA T32 MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver . 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) <QRB3126-A/N>104 En 104 Appendix Additional Information
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT un es en- coded only) (V er . 8.2 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2, 6 (.avi, .div x) SD Compatible physical format ..................................................... Version 1.10 File system .................................. FA T12, FA T16, FA T32 MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ver . 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT un es en- coded only) (V er . 8.2 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2, 6 (.avi, .div x) FM tuner F requency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IHF-A networ k) AM tuner F requency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 õV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IHF-A networ k) Bluetooth (AVH-P3300BT) V ersion .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0 certified Output power ............................ 4 dBm Max. (P ower class 2) CEA2006 Specifications P ower output ............................. 14 W RMS à4 Ch annels (4 W and ⦠1 % THD N) S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 W) Note Specifications and the design are subject to mod- ifications without notice. <QRB3126-A/N>105 En 105 Appendix Additional Information Additional Information
<QRB3126-A/N>106 En 106
<QRB3126-A/N>107 En 107
<QRB3126-A/N>108
<QRB3126-A/N>109
<QRB3126-A/N>110
<QRB3126-A/N>111
PIONEER CORPORA TION 1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagaw a 212-0031, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 5 Arco Lane, Heather ton, Victoria, 3202 Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allsta te Parkway , Markham, Ontar io L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 TEL: 905-479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ å°å 帠堧 æ¹Âå ç 堠路 407 èÂÂ8 樠é» 話 ï¼ (02) 2657-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 ï¼ (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright ã 2010 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Thailand <QRB3126-A/N> UC <K OMZX> <10J00000> <QRB3126-A/N>112